+ All Categories
Home > Documents > 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

Date post: 21-Sep-2014
Category:
Upload: thomas-ngoma
View: 1,028 times
Download: 6 times
Share this document with a friend
Popular Tags:
180
GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I Contents Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i Contents 9 UMTS HSPA Networks ............................................................................................................9-1 9.1 Planning and Optimizing UMTS Base Stations ............................................................................................ 9-2 9.1.1 Creating a UMTS Base Station ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations ..................................................................................................... 9-21 9.1.3 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ..................................................................... 9-22 9.1.4 Display Hints for Base Stations ......................................................................................................... 9-25 9.1.5 Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network.............................................................................................. 9-26 9.1.6 Creating a Repeater ............................................................................................................................ 9-26 9.1.7 Creating a Remote Antenna ............................................................................................................... 9-30 9.1.8 Setting the Working Area of a U-Net Document................................................................................ 9-32 9.1.9 Studying a Single Base Station .......................................................................................................... 9-33 9.1.10 Studying Base Stations..................................................................................................................... 9-42 9.1.11 Planning Neighbors .......................................................................................................................... 9-90 9.1.12 Planning Scrambling Codes ........................................................................................................... 9-103 9.2 Studying Network Capacity ...................................................................................................................... 9-113 9.2.1 Defining Multi-Service Traffic Data ................................................................................................ 9-114 9.2.2 Creating a Traffic Map ..................................................................................................................... 9-114 9.2.3 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations .............................................................................. 9-125 9.2.4 Analyzing the Results of a Simulation ............................................................................................. 9-151 9.3 Optimizing and Verifying Network Capacity ............................................................................................ 9-153 9.3.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path .................................................................................................. 9-154 9.3.2 Network Verification ........................................................................................................................ 9-156 9.3.3 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window .................................................................... 9-163 9.4 Advanced Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 9-163 9.4.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference .................................................................................................. 9-163 9.4.2 Defining Frequency Bands............................................................................................................... 9-164 9.4.3 The Global Transmitter Parameters.................................................................................................. 9-165 9.4.4 Radio Bearers ................................................................................................................................... 9-166 9.4.5 Site Equipment ................................................................................................................................. 9-170 9.4.6 Receiver Equipment ......................................................................................................................... 9-172 9.4.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set ............................................................................................ 9-175 9.4.8 Modeling Shadowing ....................................................................................................................... 9-175
Transcript
Page 1: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I Contents

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i

Contents

9 UMTS HSPA Networks ............................................................................................................9-1 9.1 Planning and Optimizing UMTS Base Stations ............................................................................................9-2

9.1.1 Creating a UMTS Base Station ............................................................................................................9-3 9.1.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations .....................................................................................................9-21 9.1.3 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map .....................................................................9-22 9.1.4 Display Hints for Base Stations .........................................................................................................9-25 9.1.5 Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network..............................................................................................9-26 9.1.6 Creating a Repeater............................................................................................................................9-26 9.1.7 Creating a Remote Antenna ...............................................................................................................9-30 9.1.8 Setting the Working Area of a U-Net Document................................................................................9-32 9.1.9 Studying a Single Base Station ..........................................................................................................9-33 9.1.10 Studying Base Stations.....................................................................................................................9-42 9.1.11 Planning Neighbors..........................................................................................................................9-90 9.1.12 Planning Scrambling Codes ...........................................................................................................9-103

9.2 Studying Network Capacity ......................................................................................................................9-113 9.2.1 Defining Multi-Service Traffic Data ................................................................................................9-114 9.2.2 Creating a Traffic Map.....................................................................................................................9-114 9.2.3 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations ..............................................................................9-125 9.2.4 Analyzing the Results of a Simulation .............................................................................................9-151

9.3 Optimizing and Verifying Network Capacity............................................................................................9-153 9.3.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path ..................................................................................................9-154 9.3.2 Network Verification........................................................................................................................9-156 9.3.3 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window ....................................................................9-163

9.4 Advanced Configuration ...........................................................................................................................9-163 9.4.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference ..................................................................................................9-163 9.4.2 Defining Frequency Bands...............................................................................................................9-164 9.4.3 The Global Transmitter Parameters..................................................................................................9-165 9.4.4 Radio Bearers...................................................................................................................................9-166 9.4.5 Site Equipment.................................................................................................................................9-170 9.4.6 Receiver Equipment.........................................................................................................................9-172 9.4.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set ............................................................................................9-175 9.4.8 Modeling Shadowing .......................................................................................................................9-175

Page 2: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I Figures

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii

Figures

Figure 9-1 New Site dialog box..........................................................................................................................9-4

Figure 9-2 Transmitter dialog box–Transmitter tab............................................................................................9-6

Figure 9-3 The Equipment Specifications dialog box ........................................................................................9-7

Figure 9-4 The Radio toolbar ...........................................................................................................................9-14

Figure 9-5 Station Template Properties dialog box – General tab ....................................................................9-16

Figure 9-6 Station Template Properties dialog box – Transmitter tab ..............................................................9-17

Figure 9-7 Station Template Properties dialog box – WCDMA/UMTS tab.....................................................9-18

Figure 9-8 Station Template Properties dialog box – HSDPA tab ....................................................................9-19

Figure 9-9 Station Template Properties dialog box – Neighbors tab ................................................................9-19

Figure 9-10 Point Analysis Tool–Profile tab ....................................................................................................9-37

Figure 9-11 An example of a computation zone...............................................................................................9-38

Figure 9-12 Condition settings for a signal level coverage prediction .............................................................9-41

Figure 9-13 Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level ........................................................9-47

Figure 9-14 Coverage prediction by signal level..............................................................................................9-48

Figure 9-15 Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter .........................................................9-49

Figure 9-16 Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones .............................................9-51

Figure 9-17 Displaying coverage prediction results using tool tips .................................................................9-52

Figure 9-18 Point Analysis Window–Reception tab.........................................................................................9-53

Figure 9-19 Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level......................................................................9-57

Figure 9-20 Signal level coverage prediction of existing network ...................................................................9-59

Figure 9-21 Signal level coverage prediction of network with new site ..........................................................9-60

Figure 9-22 Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions .................................................................9-61

Figure 9-23 Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network...............................................................9-62

Figure 9-24 Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications .............................................9-62

Figure 9-25 Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions ..................................................................9-63

Figure 9-26 Simulation settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones............................................9-72

Page 3: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

Figures GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Figure 9-27 Point analysis on the map .............................................................................................................9-82

Figure 9-28 AS Analysis tab.............................................................................................................................9-83

Figure 9-29 Neighbors of Site 22(0).................................................................................................................9-97

Figure 9-30 Traffic map properties dialog box - Traffic tab ...........................................................................9-120

Figure 9-31 Environment Map Editor toolbar ................................................................................................9-122

Figure 9-32 Schematic view of simulation algorithm ....................................................................................9-126

Figure 9-33 HSDPA bearer selection..............................................................................................................9-127

Figure 9-34 Displaying the traffic distribution by handover status ................................................................9-133

Figure 9-35 Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status..............................................................9-134

Figure 9-36 Displaying the traffic distribution by service..............................................................................9-135

Figure 9-37 The active set of a user ...............................................................................................................9-135

Figure 9-38 The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialog box...................................................9-155

Figure 9-39 The Filter dialog box –Advanced tab..........................................................................................9-158

Figure 9-40 The Test Mobile Data window....................................................................................................9-162

Figure 9-41 The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialog box ..........................................................................9-177

Page 4: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1

9 UMTS HSPA Networks

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

9.1 Planning and Optimizing UMTS Base Stations

The methods to plan and optimize the UMTS Base Station.

9.2 Studying Network Capacity

Defining data, creating map, calculating and analyzing the simulation.

9.3 Optimizing and Verifying Network Capacity

How to import and export the test mobile data. How to verify the network.

9.4 Advanced Configuration Eight methods to carry out advanced configuration.

Page 5: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The U-Net enables you to create and modify all aspects of a UMTS HSPA (HSDPA and HSUPA) network. Once you have created the network, the U-Net offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the parameters defining the network.

Planning the UMTS HSPA network and creating the network of base stations is described in 9.1 "Planning and Optimizing UMTS Base Stations." Allocating neighbors and scrambling codes is also described. In this section, you will also find information on how you can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in the U-Net study base stations.

Using traffic maps to study network capacity is described. Creating simulations using the traffic map information and analyzing the results of simulations is also described.

Using pilot mobile data paths to verify the network is described in 9.1 "Planning and Optimizing UMTS Base Stations." How to filter imported pilot mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also described.

Many of the factors affecting network performance, such as shadowing margins or power control parameters, can be defined. These parameters are explained in9.3 Optimizing and Verifying Network Capacity. As well, you will find descriptions of how these factors affect simulation results.

9.1 Planning and Optimizing UMTS Base Stations As you work on your U-Net document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones.

In the U-Net, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In the U-Net, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such as the TMA and feeder cables. In a UMTS project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the characteristics of a carrier on a transmitter.

The U-Net lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once, by creating a station template. Using a station template, you can create one or more base stations at the same time. In the U-Net, a base station refers to a site with its transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells.

The U-Net allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or transmitter coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or studied.

The U-Net enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as effective service area, noise, or handover status predictions, on the network.

In this section, the following operations are described:

Creating a UMTS Base Station Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map Display Hints for Base Stations Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network Creating a Repeater Creating a Remote Antenna

Page 6: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-3

Setting the Working Area of a U-Net Document Studying a Single Base Station Studying Base Stations Planning Neighbors Planning Scrambling Codes

9.1.1 Creating a UMTS Base Station When you create a UMTS site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells, is called a base station.

In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, refer to "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element." If you need to create a large number of base stations, the U-Net allows you to import them from another U-Net document or from an external source.

Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template.

1.Site Description

The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialog box. The Properties dialog box has two tabs:

Page 7: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The General tab shown in Figure 9-1:

Figure 9-1 New Site dialog box

− Name: The U-Net automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here. If you want to change the default name that the U-Net gives to new sites, refer to the Administrator Manual.

− Position: By default, the U-Net places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.

While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialog box afterwards.

− Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, the U-Net will use this value for calculations.

− Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish. The Equipment tab:

− Max Number of Uplink Channel Elements: The maximum number of physical radio resources for the current site in the uplink. By default, the U-Net enters the maximum possible (256).

− Max Number of Downlink Channel Elements: The maximum number of physical radio resources for the current site in the downlink. By default, the U-Net enters the maximum possible (256).

− Equipment: You can choose equipment from the list. To create new site equipment, refer to "Creating Site Equipment."

If no equipment is assigned to the site, the U-Net considers the following default values: − Rake efficiency factor = 1 − MUD factor = 0 − Carrier selection = UL minimum noise − Overhead CEs downlink and uplink = 0

Page 8: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-5

− The option AS restricted to neighbors is not chosen, and the U-Net uses one channel element on the uplink or downlink for any service during power control simulation.

2.Transmitter Description

The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialog box. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialog box has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialog box has three additional tabs: the Cells tab, the Propagation tab and the Display tab.

The General tab: − Name: By default, the U-Net names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an

underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let the U-Net assign a name. If you want to change the way the U-Net names transmitters, refer to the Administrators Manual.

− Site: You can choose the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have chosen the site, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located.

− Frequency Band: You can choose a Frequency Band for the transmitter. Once you have chosen the frequency band, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the band.

− Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site.

Page 9: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The Transmitter tab shown in Figure 9-2:

Figure 9-2 Transmitter dialog box–Transmitter tab

− Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must choose the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab.

Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.

− Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise figure of the transmitter. The U-Net calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned by using the Equipment Specifications dialog box which is displayed when you click the Equipment button.

− In the Equipment Specifications dialog box (see Figure 9-3), the equipment you choose and the gains and losses you define are used to initialize total transmitter UL and DL losses:

TMA: You can choose a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA.

Feeder: You can choose a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder.

BTS: You can choose a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS.

Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception.

Page 10: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7

Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value you enter must be positive.

Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter must be positive.

Figure 9-3 The Equipment Specifications dialog box

Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated losses. The U-Net always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialog box. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception and the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.

− Diversity: Under Diversity, you can choose the type of diversity from the Transmission and Reception lists. Antennas:

Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building.

Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters.

Under Secondary Antennas, you can choose one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for the main antenna.

3.Cell Definition

Page 11: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

In the U-Net, a cell is defined as a carrier, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you can configure a UMTS multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier.

When you create a transmitter, the U-Net reminds you to create at least one cell for the transmitter. The following describes the parameters of a UMTS cell, including the parameters for HSDPA and HSUPA functionality. As you create a cell, the U-Net calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can modify these values.

The properties of a UMTS cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialog box of the transmitter to which it is assigned.

The Cells tab has the following options:

Inter-Carrier Power Sharing: You can enable power sharing between cells by choosing the Inter-Carrier Power Sharing check box under HSDPA and entering a value in the Maximum Shared Power box. In order for Inter-Carrier Power Sharing to be available, you must have at least one HSDPA carrier with dynamic power allocation. Inter-Carrier Power Sharing enables the network to dynamically allocate available power from R99-only and HSDPA carriers among HSDPA carriers. When you choose Inter-Carrier Power Sharing and you define a maximum shared power, the Max Power of each cell is used to determine the percentage of the transmitter power that the cell cannot exceed. To use power sharing efficiently, you should set the Max Power of the cells to the same value as the Maximum Shared Power. For example, if the Maximum Shared Power is defined as 43 dBm, the Max Power of all cells should be set to 43 dBm in order to be able to use 100% of the available power. In this case, a cell’s unused power can be distributed to other HSDPA cells.

Name: By default, the U-Net names the cell after its transmitter, adding the carrier number in parentheses. If you change transmitter name or carrier, the U-Net does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let the U-Net assign a name. If you want to change the way the U-Net names cells, refer to The Administrators Manual.

Carrier: The number of the carrier. Active: If this cell is to be active, you must choose the Active check box. Max Power (dBm): The maximum available downlink power for the cell. Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power. SCH power (dBm): The average power of both the synchronization channels (PSCH

and SSCH).

The SCH power is only transmitted 1 /10 of the time. Consequently, the value entered for the SCH power should only be 1/10 of its value when transmitted, in order to respect its actual interference on other channels.

Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels (PCCPCH, SCCPCH, AICH, PICH, PSCH, and SSCH).

By default, the SCH power and CCH power are set as absolute values. You can set these values as relative to the pilot power by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab and Properties from the shortcut menu. Then, on the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialog box, under DL Powers, you can choose Relative to Pilot. The SCH power and CCH power will then be set as relative to the pilot power.

Page 12: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-9

AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold. It is the Ec/I0 margin in comparison with the Ec/I0 of the best server. It is used to determine which cells, apart from the best server, will be part of the active set.

DL Peak Rate per User (kbps): The downlink peak rate per user in kbps. The DL peak rate per user is the maximum connection rate in the downlink for a user. The DL and UL peak rates are taken into account during power control simulation.

UL Peak Rate per User (kbps): The uplink peak rate per user in kbps. The UL peak rate per user is the maximum connection rate in the uplink for a user. The DL and UL peak rates are taken into account during power control simulation.

Max DL Load (% Max Power): The percentage of the maximum downlink power (set in Max Power) not to be exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the option DL Load is chosen. If the DL load option is not chosen during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration.

Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during the simulation.

Total Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on downlink is the total power necessary to serve R99 and HSDPA users. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.

UL Load Factor (%): The uplink cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.

UL Reuse Factor: The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cellular interference (signals received by the transmitter respectively from intra and extra-cellular terminals). This is the ratio between the total uplink interference and the intra-cellular interference. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.

Scrambling code domain: The scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code belongs. This and the scrambling code reuse distance are used by the scrambling code planning algorithm.

SC Reuse Distance: The scrambling code reuse distance. This and the scrambling code domain are used by the scrambling code planning algorithm.

Primary scrambling code: The primary scrambling code. Comments: If desired, you can enter any comments in this field. Max number of intra-carrier neighbors: The maximum number of intra-carrier

neighbors for this cell. This value is used by the intra-carrier neighbor allocation algorithm.

Max number of inter-carrier neighbors: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbors for this cell. This value is used by the inter-carrier neighbor allocation algorithm.

Max number of inter-technology neighbors: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbors for this cell. This value is used by the inter-technology neighbor allocation algorithm.

Neighbors: You can access a dialog box in which you can set both intratechnology (intra-carrier and inter-carrier) and inter-technology neighbors by clicking the Browse button ( ).

The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbors box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button display by clicking Apply.

Page 13: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

HSDPA: The HSDPA check box is chosen if the cell has HSDPA functionality. When the HSDPA check box is chosen, the following fields are also available: − HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modeling dynamic power allocation,

the HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation should be checked. During a simulation, the U-Net first allocates power to R99 users and then dynamically allocates the remaining power of the cell to the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. At the end of the simulation, you can commit the calculated HSDPA power and total power values to each cell.

In the context of dynamic power allocation, the total power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom.

− Available HSDPA Power (dBm): When you are modeling static power allocation, the HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation check box is cleared and the available HSDPA power is entered in this box. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users.

− Power Headroom (dB): The power headroom is a reserve of power that the U-Net keeps for Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH) in case of fast fading. During simulation, HSDPA users will not be connected if the cell power remaining after serving R99 users is less than the power headroom value.

− HSSCCH Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modeling dynamic power allocation the HSSCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box should be checked and a value should be entered in HSSCCH Power (dBm). During power control, the U-Net will control HSSCCH power in order to meet the minimum quality threshold (as defined for each mobility type). The value entered in HSSCCH Power (dBm) is the maximum power available for each HSSCCH channel. The calculated power for each HSDPA user during the simulation cannot exceed this maximum value.

− HS-SCCH Power (dBm): The value for each HSSCCH channel will be used if you are modeling dynamic power allocation. If you have chosen the HSSCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and modeling dynamic power allocation, the value entered here represents a maximum for each HSDPA user. If you have not chosen the HSSCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and are modeling static power allocation, the value entered here represents the actual HSSCCH power per HSSCCH channel.

− Number of HS-SCCH Channels: The maximum number of HSSCCH channels for this cell. Each HSDPA user consumes one HS-SCCH channel. Therefore, at any given time (over a time transmission interval), the number of HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell.

− Min. Number of HS-PDSCH Codes: The minimum number of OVSF codes available for HSPDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations in order to find a suitable bearer.

− Max Number of HS-PDSCH codes: The maximum number of OVSF codes available for HSPDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations and coverage predictions in order to find a suitable bearer.

− Max Number of HSDPA Users: The maximum number of HSDPA bearer users (HSDPA and HSUPA users) that this cell can support at any given time.

− Number of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA bearer users (HSDPA and HSUPA users) is an average and can be used for certain coverage predictions. You can enter this value yourself, or have the value calculated by the U-Net using a simulation.

− HSDPA Scheduler Algorithm: The scheduling technique that will be used to rank the HSDPA users to be served:

Page 14: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-11

Max C/I: HSDPA users will be sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI).

Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (that is, in random order).

Proportional Fair: HSDPA users are first sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI). Then, the first "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are chosen and put into the same order as in the simulation.

− HSUPA: The HSUPA check box is chosen if the cell has HSUPA functionality. When the HSUPA check box is chosen, the following fields are also available:

DL HSUPA Power: The power (in dBm) allocated to HSUPA DL channels (EAGCH, ERGCH, and EHICH). This value must be entered by the user.

Max Number of HSUPA Users: The maximum number of HSUPA users that this cell can support at any given time.

UL Load Factor Due to HSUPA (%): The percentage of the load factor due to HSUPA. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.

Number of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users is an average and can be used for certain coverage predictions. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.

Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells.

1.Creating or Modifying a Site

You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, through the site’s Properties dialog box. How you access the Properties dialog box depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site.

To create or modify a site, perform the following steps:

If you are creating a new site:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Sites folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Sites New Element Properties dialog box is displayed (see Figure 9-1).

----End

If you are modifying the properties of an existing site:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

Step 3 Right-click the site you want to modify.

Page 15: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The site’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Modify the parameters.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

2.Creating or Modifying a Transmitter

You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, through the transmitter’s Properties dialog box. How you access the Properties dialog box depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter.

To create or modify a transmitter, perform the following steps:

If you are creating a new transmitter,

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Transmitters New Element Properties dialog box is displayed (see Figure 9-2).

----End

If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter,

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the transmitter you want to modify.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The transmitter’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Modify the parameters.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

If you are creating a new transmitter and the U-Net reminds you to create a cell.

3.Creating or Modifying a Cell

You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, through the Properties dialog box of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you

Page 16: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-13

access the Properties dialog box depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell.

To create or modify a cell, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The transmitter’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Choose the Cells tab.

Step 6 Modify the parameters.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Placing a New Station Using a Station Template In the U-Net, a station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With the U-Net, you can create a network by placing stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the cells.

To place a new station using a station template, perform the following steps:

Step 1 In the Radio toolbar, choose a template from the list.

Step 2 Click the New Station button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

Step 3 In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station.

The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.

Step 4 Click the button to place the station.

----End

To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Station

button. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, the U-Net displays its tip text with its

exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.

You can also place a series of stations using a U-Net template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the stations. The U-Net calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius in the station template.

To place a series of stations within a defined area, perform the following steps:

Page 17: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 1 In the Radio toolbar, choose a template from the list.

Step 2 Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of stations created from the same station template.

If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this template is not defined.

Step 3 Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of stations:

1. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. 2. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone

changes direction. 3. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.

----End

The U-Net fills the delimited zone with new stations and their hexagonal shapes. Station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders.

You can work with the sites and transmitters in these stations as you work with any station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.

1.Placing a Station on an Existing Site

When you place a new station using a station template, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing site.

To place a station on an existing site, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder.

Step 2 In the Radio toolbar, choose a template from the list.

Step 3 Click the New Station button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

Step 4 Move the pointer to the site on the map.

When the frame is displayed around the site, indicating it is chosen, click to place the station.

----End

Managing Station Templates The U-Net comes with UMTS station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar shown in Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4 The Radio toolbar

1.Creating or Modifying a Station Template

Page 18: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-15

When you create a station template, the U-Net bases it on the station template chosen in the Station Template Properties dialog box. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by choosing the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ.

As well, you can modify the properties of any station template.

To create or modify a station template, perform the following steps:

If you are creating a station template:

Step 1 In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.

Step 2 Choose Manage Templates from the list.

The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Under Station Templates, choose the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

----End

If you are modifying the properties of a station template:

Step 1 In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.

Step 2 Choose Manage Templates from the list.

The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Under Station Templates, choose the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the General tab of the Properties dialog box.

In this tab page, you can modify the following: the Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, and the Hexagon Radius, that is, the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by this station.

Page 19: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Figure 9-5 Station Template Properties dialog box – General tab

Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the antenna from the ground (that is, the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt.

Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix.

Step 5 Click the Transmitter tab.

In this tab page (see Figure 9-6), if the Active check box is chosen, you can modify the following:

Under Transmission/Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifications dialog box and modify the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA), feeder cables, or base transceiver station (BTS). For information on the Equipment Specifications dialog box, refer to "2.Transmitter Description."

The information in the real Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialog box (see Figure 9-3). Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated losses. The U-Net always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.

The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialog box. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception. Any value you enter must be positive.

Page 20: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-17

Under Diversity, you can choose the diversity from the Transmission and Reception lists.

Figure 9-6 Station Template Properties dialog box – Transmitter tab

Step 6 Click the WCDMA/UMTS tab.

In this tab page (see Figure 9-7), you modify the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell) that this station supports. For information on carriers and cells, refer to "3.Cell Definition."

You can choose the Carriers for this template. Under Power, you can choose the Power Shared Between Cells check box. As well,

you can modify the Pilot, the SCH, the Other CCH powers, and the AS Threshold. Under Simulation Constraints, you can modify the Max Power, the Max DL Load

(defined as a percentage of the maximum power), the DL Peak Rate/User, the Max UL Load Factor, and the UL Peak Rate/User.

Under Load Conditions, you can modify the Total Transmitted Power and the UL Load Factor.

You can also modify the Number of Uplink and Downlink Channel Elements and choose the Equipment.

Page 21: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Figure 9-7 Station Template Properties dialog box – WCDMA/UMTS tab

Step 7 Click the HSDPA/HSUPA tab.

In this tab (see Figure 9-8), if the HSDPA supported check box is chosen, you can modify the following under HSDPA:

You can choose the Allocation Strategy (Static or Dynamic). If you choose Static as the Allocation Strategy, you can enter the HSDPA Power. If you choose Dynamic as the Allocation Strategy, you choose the Inter-Carrier Power Sharing option and enter the Max. Shared Power.

Under HSPDSCH, you can modify the Min. and Max number of codes and the Power Headroom.

Under HSSCCH, you can choose the Allocation Strategy (Static or Dynamic) and the Number of channels.

Under Scheduler, you can modify the Algorithm, the Max Number of Users, and the Number of Users.

Under HSUPA, if the HSUPA supported check box is chosen, you can modify the following:

You can modify the DL Power, the UL Load, the Max Number of Users, and the Number of Users.

Page 22: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-19

Figure 9-8 Station Template Properties dialog box – HSDPA tab

Click the Neighbors tab. In this tab shown in Figure 9-9, you can modify the Max Number of Intra and Inter-Carrier Neighbors and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbors.

Figure 9-9 Station Template Properties dialog box – Neighbors tab

Page 23: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 8 Click the Other Properties tab.

The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialog box.

Step 9 When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialog box and save your changes.

----End

2.Modifying a Field in a Station Template

To modify a field in a station template, perform the following steps:

Step 1 In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.

Step 2 Choose Manage Templates from the list.

The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Choose the template in the Available Templates list.

Step 4 Click the Fields button.

In the dialog box that is displayed, you have the following options:

Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field,: − Click the Add button. − The Field Definition dialog box is displayed. − Enter a Name for the new field. − For Type, you can choose from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double,

True/False, Date/Time, and Currency. − If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a Choice

list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing Enter after each one.

− Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field. − Click OK to close the Field Definition dialog box and save your changes.

Delete: To delete a user-defined field: − Choose the user-defined field you want to delete. − Click the Delete button. − The user-defined field is displayed in strikeout. It will be definitively deleted when

you close the dialog box. Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field:

− Choose the user-defined field you want to modify. − Click the Properties button. − The Field Definition dialog box is displayed. − Modify any of the properties as desired. − Click OK to close the Field Definition dialog box and save your changes.

Step 5 Click OK.

Page 24: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-21

----End

3.Deleting a Station Template

To delete a station template, perform the following steps:

Step 1 In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.

Step 2 Choose Manage Templates from the list.

The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Under Station Templates, choose the station template you want to delete and click Delete.

The template is deleted.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

9.1.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates. If you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current U-Net document and create a group of base stations.

When you import data into your current U-Net document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the U-Net document to match the source data.

You can import base station data in the following ways:

Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another U-Net document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current U-Net document. When you create a group of base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order.

Important:

The table you data copy from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into.

Importing data: If you have data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another U-Net document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current U-Net document. When you are importing, the U-Net allows you to choose what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order.

You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using The Hexagonal Design tool on The Radio toolbar.

Page 25: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

9.1.3 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In the U-Net, you can access the Properties dialog box of a site or transmitter through the shortcut menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. In a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. The U-Net lets you access the Properties dialog box of sites and transmitters directly from the map. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting the U-Net find a higher location for it.

In this section, the following operations are described:

Opening the Properties Dialog box for an Object on the Map----End Moving a Site Using the Mouse

Moving a Site to a Higher Location----End Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse

Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site

Opening the Properties Dialog box for an Object on the Map You can modify a property of a site or transmitter by opening its Properties dialog box from the map.

To open the Properties dialog box of a data object from the map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click the object in the map window.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

When a map has many data objects, it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been chosen. When a site is chosen, the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). When a transmitter is chosen, both ends of its icon have a green point ( ).

Step 2 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed. For information on the Sites Properties dialog box, refer to "Creating a UMTS Base

Station." For information on the Transmitter Properties dialog box, refer to "2.Transmitter

Description."

----End

Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialog box, or by using the mouse.

To move a site using the mouse, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click and drag the site to the desired position.

As you drag the site, the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.

Page 26: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-23

Step 2 Release the site where you would like to place it. By default, the U-Net locks the position of a site. When the position of a site is locked, the U-Net asks you to confirm that you wanted to move the site.

Step 3 Click Yes.

----End

While this method allows you to place a site quickly, you can adjust the location more precisely by editing their coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialog box.

Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site, in terms of reception and transmission, the U-Net can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site.

To have the U-Net move a site to a higher location, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click the site in the map window.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Move to a Higher Location.

Step 3 In the Move to a Higher Location dialog box, enter the radius of the area in which the U-Net should search and click OK.

The U-Net moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius.

----End

Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In the U-Net, you can set the azimuth of a transmitter’s antenna by modifying it on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter Properties dialog box, or you can modify it on the map, using the mouse. The azimuth is defined in degrees, with 0° indicating north.

The precision of the change to the azimuth depends on the distance of the pointer from the transmitter symbol. Moving the pointer changes the azimuth by:

1 degree when the pointer is within a distance of 10 times the size of the transmitter symbol.

0.1 degree when the cursor is moved outside this region.

To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the map, click the antenna whose azimuth you want to modify.

Step 2 Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ).

An arc with an arrow is displayed under the pointer.

Step 3 Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth.

The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar.

Page 27: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 4 Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle.

The antenna’s azimuth is modified on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter Properties

dialog box.

----End

You can also modify the azimuth on the map for all the antennas on a base station using the mouse.

To modify the azimuth of all the antennas on a base station using the mouse, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the map, click one of the antennas whose azimuth you want to modify.

Step 2 Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ).

An arc with an arrow is displayed under the pointer.

Step 3 Hold CTRL and, on the map, click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth.

The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar.

Step 4 Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth of the chosen antenna to the desired angle.

The azimuth of the chosen antenna is modified on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter Properties dialog box. The azimuth of the other antennas on the base station is offset by the

same amount as the azimuth of the chosen antenna.

----End

If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth, you can undo your changes by using Undo (by choosing Edit > Undo or by pressing Ctrl+Z) to undo the changes made.

Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site By default, transmitters are placed on the site. However, transmitters are occasionally not located directly on the site, but a short distance away. In the U-Net, you can change the position of the transmitter relative to the site by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters on the General tab of the Transmitter Property dialog box. Dx and Dy are the distance in meters of the transmitter from the site position. You can also modify the position of the transmitter on the map, using the mouse.

To move a transmitter using the mouse, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the map, click the transmitter you want to move.

Step 2 Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ).

A cross is displayed under the pointer.

Page 28: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-25

Step 3 On the map, click the transmitter you want to move.

Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). A cross is displayed

under the pointer.

Step 4 Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the transmitter’s position relative to the site.

The current position (Dx and Dy) of the transmitter is displayed in the far right of the status

bar.

Step 5 Release the mouse when you have moved the chosen transmitter to the desired position.

The position of the chosen transmitter is modified on the General tab of the Transmitter

Properties dialog box.

Dx and Dy values are automatically modified in the transmitter properties.

----End

If you make a mistake when changing the position of the transmitter, you can undo your changes by using Undo (by choosing Edit > Undo or by pressing Ctrl+Z) to undo the changes made.

9.1.4 Display Hints for Base Stations The U-Net allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of different ways. This enables you not only to display chosen information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance.

The following tools can be used to display information about base stations:

Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display.

Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the cursor over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add.

Transmitter color: You can set the transmitter color to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can choose "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." The U-Net then automatically assigns a color to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different color than the transmitters surrounding it.

Transmitter symbol: You can choose one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can choose a symbol that graphically represents the transmitters

Page 29: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

bandwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by choosing different symbols for each ( ) and ( ).

9.1.5 Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network In the U-Net, you can model a dual-band UMTS network, that is, a network consisting of 2100 MHz and 900 MHz transmitters, in one document.

9.1.6 Creating a Repeater A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier both in downlink and uplink. It has a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter. This signal may be carried by different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal.

The U-Net models RF repeaters and microwave repeaters. The modeling focuses on:

The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters in the downlink. The UL total gain value in service areas studies (effective service area and UL Eb/Nt

service area) and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.

Broad-band repeaters are not modeled. The U-Net assumes that all carriers from the 3G donor transmitter are amplified.

Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment You can define repeater equipment to be assigned to each repeater in the network.

To create or modify repeater equipment, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Repeaters > Equipment from the shortcut menu.

The Repeater Equipment table is displayed.

To create repeater equipment, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ): − Enter a Name and Manufacturer for the new equipment. − Enter a Noise Figure. The repeater causes a rise in noise at the donor transmitter, so

the noise figure is used to calculate the UL loss to be added to the donor transmitter UL losses. The noise figure must be a positive value.

− Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These parameters enable the U-Net to ensure that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the equipment if there are any.

− Enter a Gain Increment. The U-Net uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater amplifier gain using the buttons to the right of the Amplification box ( ) on the General tab of the repeater Properties dialog box.

− If desired, enter an Internal Delay and Comments. These fields are for information only and are not used in calculations.

Page 30: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-27

To modify repeater equipment, change the parameters in the row containing the repeater equipment you wish to modify.

----End

Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In the U-Net, you can create a repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have the U-Net automatically create a new site.

To create a repeater and place it using the mouse, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose the donor transmitter.

You can choose it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map.

Step 2 Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button ( ) on the Radio toolbar.

Step 3 Choose Repeater from the menu.

Step 4 Click the map to place the repeater.

The repeater is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same color as the donor transmitter. By default, the repeater has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tootip and label identify the repeater and the donor transmitter.

You can see to which base station the repeater is connected by clicking it; the U-Net displays a link to the donor transmitter.

----End

Creating Several Repeaters In the U-Net, the characteristics of each repeater are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several repeaters at the same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table:

If you have data in table form, either in another U-Net document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Repeaters table in your current U-Net document.

Important:

The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into.

Defining the Properties of a Repeater To define the properties of a repeater, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click the repeater either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Page 31: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 3 Click the General tab.

You can modify the following parameters:

You can change the Name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are named "RepeaterN" where "N" is a number assigned as the repeater is created.

You can change the Donor transmitter by choosing it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialog box of the donor transmitter.

You can change the Site on which the repeater is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialog box of the site.

You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the repeater is not located on the site itself.

You can choose equipment from the Equipment list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialog box of the equipment.

You can change the Amplification gain. The amplification gain is used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.

Step 4 Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters:

Under Donor-Repeater Link, choose a Link Type. − If you choose Microwave Link, enter the Link Losses and continue with the

Coverage Site tab. You can modify the following parameters: − If you choose Air Link, enter the Propagation Losses or click Calculate to

determine the actual propagation losses between the donor and the repeater. When you create an off-air repeater, it is assumed that the link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network. The propagation losses between donor transmitter and repeater are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.

Important:

If you want to create a remote antenna, you must choose Optical Fibre Link.

− If you choose Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Antenna:

Choose a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna.

Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM.

Enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.

You can click the Calculate button to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button.

− If you choose Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Feeders:

Choose a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder.

Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception.

Step 5 Click the Coverage Site tab. You can modify the following parameters:

Page 32: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-29

Choose the Active check box. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated.

Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. The U-Net uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the repeater. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb/Nt service area studies.

The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power or SCH power). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder losses), amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses).

The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), amplification gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses).

Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: − Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will

be added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. − Under Main Antenna, choose a Model from the list. You can click the Browse

button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth and height) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter.

− Under Secondary Antennas, you can choose one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power.

Under Feeders, you can modify the following information:

− Choose a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder.

− Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception.

Step 6 Click the Propagation tab. Since repeaters are taken into account during calculations, you must set the propagation parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the repeater (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter.

----End

Hints for Updating Repeater Parameters The U-Net provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain repeater parameters:

You can update the calculated azimuths and downtilts of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by choosing Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters shortcut menu.

You can update the UL and DL total gains of all repeaters by choosing Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters shortcut menu.

You can update the propagation losses of all off-air repeaters by choosing Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters shortcut menu.

Page 33: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

You can choose a repeater on the map and change its azimuth or its position relative to the site.

9.1.7 Creating a Remote Antenna The U-Net allows you to create remote antennas to position antennas at locations that would normally require long runs of feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station with an optic fiber. Remote antennas allow you to ensure radio coverage in an area without a new base station.

By default in the U-Net, the remote antenna is connected to a base station that does not have any antennas. It is assumed that a remote antenna, as opposed to a repeater, does not have any equipment and, therefore, does not generate any noise.

If desired, you can model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base station with antennas by creating a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, refer to 9.1.6 "Creating a Repeater."

When the U-Net models remote antennas, the modeling focuses on the coverage these systems provide on the downlink.

Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse In the U-Net, you can create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse. When you create a remote antenna, you can add it to an existing base station without antennas, or have the U-Net automatically create a new site.

To create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose the donor transmitter.

You can choose it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map.

Ensure that the remote antenna’s donor transmitter does not have any antennas.

Step 2 Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button ( ) on the Radio toolbar.

Step 3 Choose Remote Antenna from the menu.

Step 4 Click the map to place the remote antenna.

The remote antenna is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same color as the donor transmitter. By default, the remote antenna has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tootip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter.

----End

You can see to which base station the remote antenna is connected by clicking it; the U-Net displays a link to the donor transmitter.

Page 34: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-31

Creating Several Remote Antennas In the U-Net, the characteristics of each remote antenna are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several remote antennas at the same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table.

If you have data in table form, either in another U-Net document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Repeaters table in your current U-Net document.

Important:

The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into.

Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna To define the properties of a remote antenna, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click the remote antenna either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the General tab.

You can modify the following parameters:

You can change the Name of the remote antenna. By default, remote antennas are named "Remote AntennaN" where "N" is a number assigned as the remote antenna is created.

You can change the Donor transmitter by choosing it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialog box of the donor transmitter.

You can change the Site on which the remote antenna is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialog box of the site.

You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the remote antenna is not located on the site itself.

A remote antenna does not have equipment.

Step 4 Enter "0" as the Amplification gain.

Step 5 Click the Donor Side tab.

You can modify the following parameters:

Under Donor-Repeater Link, choose Optical Fibre Link and enter the Cable Losses.

Step 6 Click the Coverage Site tab.

You can modify the following parameters:

Choose the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed with in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated.

Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. The

Page 35: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

U-Net uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the remote antenna. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb/Nt service area studies. The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power or SCH power). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna. The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna.

Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: − Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will

be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM. − Under Main Antenna, choose a Model from the list. You can click the Browse

button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.

− Under Secondary Antennas, you can choose one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power.

Under Feeders, you can modify the following information:

− Choose a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder.

− Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception.

Step 7 Click the Propagation tab.

Since remote antennas are taken into account during calculations, you must set propagation parameters, as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter.

----End

Hints for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters The U-Net provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain remote antenna parameters:

You can update the UL and DL total gains of all remote antennas by choosing Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters shortcut menu.

You can choose a remote antenna on the map and change its azimuth or its position relative to the site.

9.1.8 Setting the Working Area of a U-Net Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the sites that you are interested in and generate only the results you need.

In the U-Net, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages:

Page 36: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-33

Filtering the desired sites You can simplify the selection of sites to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want to study.

Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied, limits the number of sites to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small changes in site configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zone. The computation zone defines the area where the U-Net computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo and power control simulations, while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on the computation zone, refer to "Creating a Computation Zone."

You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.

9.1.9 Studying a Single Base Station As you create a site, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the site you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of sites once you have optimized the settings for each individual site.

Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Any coverage prediction you make on a site uses the propagation model to calculate its results.

In this section, the following are described:

Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile Studying Signal Level Coverage----End

Analyzing a Coverage Prediction

Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In the U-Net, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a UMTS user. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile without calculating the path loss matrices. You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single transmitter

In this section, the following are described:

1.Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters 2.Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters

Page 37: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

3.Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter----End 4.Making a Point Analysis

1.Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters

In the U-Net, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally.

To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Propagation tab.

Step 5 Under Main Matrix:

1. Choose a Propagation Model. 2. Enter a Radius and Resolution.

Step 6 If desired, under Extended Matrix:

1. Choose a Propagation Model. 2. Enter a Radius and Resolution.

Step 7 Click OK.

The chosen propagation models will be used for all transmitters.

----End

Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter will override this entry.

2.Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters

Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In the U-Net, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model.

To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose from the Group by submenu of the shortcut menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters.

The objects in the folder are grouped by that property.

Page 38: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-35

You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialog box.

Step 4 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.

Step 5 Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 6 Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.

The Transmitters table is displayed with the transmitters from the chosen group.

For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns:

Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution

Step 7 Enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table:

1. Enter the value in the first row in the column. 2. Choose the entire column. 3. Choose Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the

other cells.

----End

If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can choose Edit > Fill > Up.

3.Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter

If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters.

When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes made globally.

To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Page 39: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 5 Click the Propagation tab.

Step 6 Under Main Matrix:

1. Choose a Propagation Model. 2. Enter a Radius and Resolution.

Step 7 If desired, under Extended Matrix:

1. Choose a Propagation Model. 2. Enter a Radius and Resolution.

Step 8 Click OK.

The chosen propagation models will be used for the chosen transmitter.

----End

4.Making a Point Analysis

To make a point analysis, perform the following steps:

Step 1 In the map window, choose the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis.

Step 2 Click the Point Analysis Tool ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

The Point Analysis Tool window is displayed and the cursor changes ( ) to represent the receiver.

Step 3 A line is displayed on the map connecting the chosen transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following:

Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by

clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the shortcut

menu: − Coordinates: Choose Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new

XY coordinates. − Target Site: Choose a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.

Step 4 Click the Profile tab.

The profile analysis is displayed in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in meters) is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). The U-Net displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern.

Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes into account diffraction mechanisms). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak.

The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab:

Page 40: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-37

The received signal strength of the chosen transmitter The propagation model used The shadowing margin The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.

You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab:

Transmitter: Choose the transmitter from the list. Carriers: Choose the carrier to be analyzed.

If you want to see a profile analysis with clutter height displayed, you can use the Height Profile tool ( ).

Step 5 Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the shortcut menu:

Properties: Choose Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialog box. This dialog box is available from the shortcut menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following: − Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. − Choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge

Coverage Probability, and, choose "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. − Choose Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list. − You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses

are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Choose Link Budget to display a dialog box with the link budget. Model Details: Choose Model Details to display a text document with details on the

displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the standard propagation model.

Figure 9-10 Point Analysis Tool–Profile tab

Fresnel ellipsoid

You can select a different transmitter, andchoose to display a profile only with a selectedcarrier.

Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin,propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance .

Line of sight Attenuation with diffraction.

----End

Page 41: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Studying Signal Level Coverage When you make a coverage prediction, the U-Net calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (that is, that are chosen by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone.

Figure 9-11 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 9-11, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the U-Net map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when the U-Net calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction.

Figure 9-11 An example of a computation zone

As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new site, without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by choosing the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction.

This section describes how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single site. A signal level coverage prediction displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied.

Page 42: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-39

You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several sites by grouping the transmitters.

To study the signal level coverage of a single base station, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder and choose Group by > Sites from the shortcut menu.

The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.

If you wish to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.

Step 3 Choose the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction:

1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. 2. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. 3. The shortcut menu is displayed. 4. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. 5. A table is displayed with the properties of the chosen group of transmitters. 6. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a

shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using for the main and extended matrices propagation models best suited for each distance.

7. In the Main Matrix column: − Choose a Propagation Model − Enter a Radius and Resolution.

8. If desired, in the Extended Matrix column: − Choose a Propagation Model − Enter a Radius and Resolution.

9. Close the table.

Step 4 In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and choose Calculations > Create a New Study from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 The Study Types dialog box lists the studies available.

They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with the U-Net, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized Studies list will be empty.

Step 6 Choose Coverage by Signal Level and click OK.

A study properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialog box:

Page 43: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and you can add a Comment. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimize the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:

Size of the Coverage Prediction Display Resolution

City Center 5 m

City 20 m

County 50 m

State 100 m

Country According to the size of the country

If you create a new coverage prediction from the shortcut menu of either the Transmitters or Predictions folder, you can choose the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons under Configuration. Because you already chose the target sites, however, only the Filter button is available.

Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 9-12). − At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered.

In Figure 9-12, a signal level less than or equal to 120 dBm will be considered. − Under Server, choose "All" to consider signal levels from all servers. − If you choose the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the

Cell Edge Coverage Probability. − You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses

are defined per clutter class. − You can choose the Carrier to be studied, or choose "All" to have all carriers taken

into account.

Page 44: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-41

Figure 9-12 Condition settings for a signal level coverage prediction

Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. − Under Display Type, choose "Value Intervals." − Under Field, choose "Best signal level." Choosing "All" or "Best signal level" on the

Conditions tab will give you the same results because the U-Net displays the results of the best server in either case. Choosing "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation.

− You can change the value intervals and their displayed color. − You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking

the Tip Text box and choosing the check boxes next to the fields you want to display in the tooltip.

− You can choose the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.

If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the prediction to obtain valid results.

Step 8 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. The U-Net automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( ) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. When you click the Calculate button ( ), the U-Net only calculates unlocked coverage predictions ( ).

----End

Page 45: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

9.1.10 Studying Base Stations

Path Loss Matrices Path loss is caused by objects in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated by the propagation model. In the U-Net, the path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone and must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.

1.Storing Path Loss Matrices

Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the U-Net document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the U-Net document result in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. As well, file size is currently limited to 2 GB by the operating system. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources.

The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning document and share the path loss matrices. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users.

When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, the U-Net creates:

One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss

matrices.

To set the storage location of the path loss matrices, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices:

Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices.

Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and choose Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the U-Net document, or Browse to choose a directory where the U-Net can save the path loss matrices externally.

Page 46: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-43

Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have chosen in Private Directory.

When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed and not only when you save the U-Net document. In order to keep consistency between the U-Net document and the stored calculations, you should save the U-Net document before closing it, if you have updated the path loss matrices.

Shared Directory: When you are working on in a multi-user U-Net environment, the project data is stored in a database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, refer to the Administrator Manual.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

2.Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices

The U-Net automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check if the path loss matrices are invalid without creating a coverage prediction.

To check if the path loss matrices are valid, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Propagation tab.

The Available Results table lists the following information for the path loss matrix for each transmitter:

Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is chosen, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the

path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is

given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter.

Page 47: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-44 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.

----End

The Calculation Process

When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button ( ), the U-Net follows the following process:

The U-Net first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone.

If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, the U-Net calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not, the U-Net will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button ( ).

The U-Net calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. The coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. The U-Net automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( ) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions folder.

You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar.

Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Draw from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Draw the computation zone:

1. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. 2. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone

changes direction. 3. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.

The computation zone is delimited by a red line.

You can also create a computation zone as follows:

Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and choosing Use as Computation Zone from the shortcut menu.

Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and choosing Import from the shortcut menu.

Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by choosing Fit to Map Window from the shortcut menu.

Page 48: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-45

You can save the computation zone in the user configuration.

----End

Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active When you make a coverage prediction, the U-Net calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (that is, that are chosen by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the sites you wish to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ).

In the U-Net, you can also set individual cells on a transmitter as active or inactive.

You can set an individual transmitter as active from its shortcut menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active by activating them from the Transmitters shortcut menu or by activating the transmitters’ cells from the Cells table.

To set an individual transmitter as active, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the transmitter you want to activate.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Active Transmitter from the shortcut menu.

The transmitter is now active.

----End

To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters shortcut menu, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Choose the transmitters you want to set as active:

1. To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The shortcut menu is displayed.

2. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Activate Transmitters from the shortcut menu.

The chosen transmitters are set as active.

----End

To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Page 49: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-46 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Open Table.

The Cells table is displayed with each cell’s parameters in a second row.

Step 4 For each cell that you want to set as active, choose the check box in the Active column.

Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters.

Calculating path loss matrices can be extremely time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects. Consequently, the U-Net offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the U-Net computing server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the computing server application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on distributed calculations, refer to the Administrator Manual.

----End

Signal Level Coverage Predictions The U-Net offers a series of standard coverage predictions that are common to all radio technologies. Coverage predictions specific to UMTS are covered in "HSDPA Coverage Prediction", and "HSUPA Coverage Prediction."

Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use prediction’s shortcut menu to make the coverage prediction into a template (which will appear in the Study Types dialog box. You can also choose Duplicate from the prediction’s shortcut menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new prediction more quickly than by creating a new coverage prediction. If you clone a coverage prediction, by choosing Clone from the shortcut menu, you can create a copy of the prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the chosen parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction.

You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new U-Net document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved, not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones.

1.Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level

A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict the best signal strength at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.

To make a coverage prediction by signal level, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Page 50: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-47

Step 4 Choose Coverage by Signal Level and click OK.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which sites to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-13). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.

At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 9-13, a signal level less than or equal to 120 dBm will be considered.

Under Server, choose "All" to consider all servers. If you choose the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell

Edge Coverage Probability. You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are

defined per clutter class. You can choose the Carrier to be studied, or choose "All" to have all carriers taken into

account.

Figure 9-13 Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

If you choose to display the results by best signal level, the coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. If you choose to display the results by signal level, the coverage prediction results will be arranged according to transmitter. Choosing "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because the U-Net displays the results of the best server in either case. Choosing "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Page 51: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-48 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window shown in Figure 9-14.

Figure 9-14 Coverage prediction by signal level

----End

2.Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter

A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.

To make a coverage prediction by transmitter, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Coverage by Transmitter and click OK.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

Page 52: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-49

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which sites to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-15).

On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.

At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 9-15, a signal level less than or equal to 120 dBm or greater then 85 dBm will be considered.

Under Server, choose "Best signal level."

You can also define a Margin. The U-Net will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.

If you choose the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.

You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

You can choose the Carrier to be studied, or choose "All" to have all carriers taken into account.

Figure 9-15 Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is chosen by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same color as that defined for each transmitter.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction.

Page 53: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-50 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

You can also predict which server is the second best server on each pixel by choosing "Second best signal level" on the Conditions tab setting "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.

----End

3.Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones

Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmitters. You can base a coverage prediction of overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.

To make coverage prediction on overlapping zones, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Overlapping Zones and click OK.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which sites to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-16).

On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.

At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 9-16, a signal level less than or equal to 120 dBm will be considered.

Under Server, choose "Best signal level" and define a Margin. The U-Net will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.

If you choose the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.

You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

You can choose the Carrier to be studied, or choose "All" to have all carriers taken into account.

Page 54: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-51

Figure 9-16 Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of servers" is chosen by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a color corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

By changing the parameters chosen on the Condition tab and by choosing different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been described in the preceding sections.

----End

Analyzing a Coverage Prediction Once you have completed a study, you can analyze the results with the tools that the U-Net provides.

The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction. If several coverage predictions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyze. You can choose which studies to display or to hide by choosing or clearing the display check box.

Page 55: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-52 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

1.Displaying the Legend Window

When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by choosing the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab.

To display the Legend window, choose View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.

2.Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tool Tips

You can get information by placing the cursor over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tool tips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction.

To get coverage prediction results in the form of tool tips, in the map window, place the cursor over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tool tip is displayed with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties shown in Figure 9-17.

Figure 9-17 Displaying coverage prediction results using tool tips

3.Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab

Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool and perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Point Analysis Tool ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

The Point Analysis Tool window is displayed and the cursor changes ( ) to represent the receiver.

Page 56: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-53

Step 2 At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab shown in Figure 9-18.

The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the color of the transmitter it represents.

At the top of the Reception tab, you can choose the carrier to be analyzed.

Figure 9-18 Point Analysis Window–Reception tab

Step 3 Right-click the Reception tab and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Analysis Properties dialog box is displayed.

1. Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. 2. Choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage

Probability, and, choose "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. 3. Choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined

per clutter class.

----End

4.Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report

The focus and hot spot zones define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone.

It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where the U-Net computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo and power control simulations, while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones.

To define a focus zone or hot spot zone, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot.

Page 57: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-54 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Draw from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Draw the focus or hot spot zone:

1. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. 2. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone

changes direction. 3. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.

A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line.

----End

You can also perform the following steps to create a focus or hot spot zone:

Step 1 Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and choosing Use as Focus Zone from the shortcut menu.

You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.

Step 2 Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and choosing Import from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by choosing Fit to Map Window from the shortcut menu.

You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map.

----End

5.Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report

The U-Net can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is chosen ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialog box.

The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to choose which columns to display or to hide.

The U-Net bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, the U-Net will use the calculation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated.

The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage.

The U-Net can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions.

To display a report on a single coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Page 58: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-55

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Predictions folder.

Step 3 Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Generate Report from the shortcut menu.

The prediction report table is displayed. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone.

----End

To display a report on all coverage predictions, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Generate Report from the shortcut menu.

The prediction report table is displayed. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone.

You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. Normally, the U-Net takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed.

----End

To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Ensure that the population geo data is visible.

Step 2 Display the report as described above.

Step 3 Choose Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map:

"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]: The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.

The U-Net saves the names of the columns you choose and will automatically choose them the next time you create a coverage prediction report.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Page 59: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-56 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue and number of customers) or density data (revenue/km² and number of customer/km²). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes and rain zones.

6.Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics

The U-Net can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is chosen ( ). By default, the U-Net displays a histogram using the coverage study colors, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialog box. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area.

The U-Net bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, the U-Net will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics.

The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage.

To display the statistics on a coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Predictions folder.

Step 3 Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Histogram from the shortcut menu.

The Statistics dialog box is displayed with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone shown in Figure 9-19.

Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can choose to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage.

The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis.

You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard

deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.

Page 60: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-57

Figure 9-19 Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level

You may observe differences between the mean and standard deviation values displayed by the U-NetA9155 and those displayed on the histogram and CDF. This is because the histogram and CDFs are calculated based on the surface area covered by the coverage prediction while the mean and standard deviation values are computed according to the coverage prediction conditions during its calculations.

----End

73Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples

The U-Net allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network.

In this section, there are two examples to describe how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways:

Intersection: This display shows the area where both prediction coverage overlap (for example, pixels covered by both studies are displayed in red).

Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one color and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different color (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue).

Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one color, pixels covered by only one of the two predictions with another color and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third color (for example, pixels covered by

Page 61: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-58 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

both studies are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).

To compare two similar coverage predictions, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network.

Step 2 Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved.

Step 3 Make the changes to the network to improve coverage.

Step 4 Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged).

Step 5 Calculate the duplicated coverage prediction.

Step 6 Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. The U-Net displays differences in coverage between them.

----End

In this section, the following examples are described:

8.Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Site 9.Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt

8.Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Site

If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added site improves coverage.

Page 62: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-59

A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made. The results are displayed in Figure 9-20. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.

Figure 9-20 Signal level coverage prediction of existing network

Page 63: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-60 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

A new site is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, or by placing a station template. Once the new site has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by choosing Duplicate from its shortcut menu. The copy is then calculated, to show the effect of the new site shown in Figure 9-21.

Figure 9-21 Signal level coverage prediction of network with new site

Now you can compare the two predictions.

To compare two predictions, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click one of the two predictions.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 From the shortcut menu, choose Compare with and, from the menu that opens, choose the prediction you want to compare with the first.

The Comparison Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the General tab.

You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments.

The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution.

Step 4 Click the Display tab.

On the Display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among:

Intersection Union

Page 64: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-61

Difference

In order to see what changes adding a new site made, you should choose Difference.

Step 5 Click OK to create the comparison.

The comparison in Figure 9-22shows clearly the area covered only by the new site.

Figure 9-22 Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions

----End

9.Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt

If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage.

Page 65: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-62 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made. The results are displayed in Figure 9-23. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.

Figure 9-23 Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network

You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna is defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialog box.

Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original coverage prediction by can be copied by choosing Duplicate from its shortcut menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage shown in Figure 9-24.

Figure 9-24 Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications

As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in propagation, you can compare the two predictions.

Page 66: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-63

To compare two predictions, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click one of the two predictions.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 From the shortcut menu, choose Compare with and, from the menu that opens, choose the prediction you want to compare with the first.

The Comparison Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the General tab.

You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments.

The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared; it consists of their name and resolution.

Step 4 Click the Display tab.

On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among:

Intersection Union Difference

In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one color and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another color. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear.

Step 5 Click OK to create the comparison.

The comparison in Figure 9-25, shows clearly the increase in coverage due at the change in antenna tilt.

Figure 9-25 Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions

----End

Page 67: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-64 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

UMTS-Specific Studies In UMTS, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load. As the network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be defined in order to calculate UMTS-specific studies.

If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte-Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, the U-Net can calculate the network load using the UL load factor and DL total power defined for each cell.

In this section, the UMTS-specific coverage predictions will be calculated using UL load factor and DL total power parameters defined at the cell level. For the purposes of these studies, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal.

Before making a prediction, you will have to set the UL load factor and DL total power and the parameters that define the services and users. These are described in the following sections:

1.Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Total Power 2.Service and User Modeling

Several different types of UMTS-specific coverage predictions are described in this section. The following quality studies are described:

8.Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction 9.Studying Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink or Uplink 10.Studying Effective Service Area.

The following noise studies, also coverage predictions, are described:

13.Studying Downlink Total Noise 14.Calculating Pilot Pollution

Another type of coverage prediction, the handover study, is also described: 15.Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction.

You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window. The analysis is calculated using UL load factor and DL total power parameters defined at the cell level and provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, mobility and a service: 16.Making an AS Analysis.

You can define a RSCP threshold to further define how results are displayed. The U-Net uses the RSCP threshold to calculate coverage predictions and to make the AS analysis. The U-Net checks which pixels have a pilot signal level which exceeds the defined RSCP threshold. Defining the RSCP threshold is described in the following section: 6.Defining the RSCP Threshold.

1.Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Total Power

If you are setting the UL load factor and the DL total power for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialog box. However, you can set the UL load factor and the DL total power for all cells using the Cells table.

To set the UL load factor and the DL total power using the Cells table, perform the following steps:

Page 68: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-65

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.

The Cells table is displayed.

Step 3 Enter a value in the following columns:

Total Power (dBm) UL Load Factor (%)

Step 4 To enter the same values in one column for all cells in the table:

1. Enter the value in the first row in the column. 2. Choose the entire column. 3. Choose Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the

other cells.

If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can choose Edit > Fill > Up.

----End

2.Service and User Modeling

Before you can model services, you must already have R99 radio bearers defined in your U-Net document. Only the following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions:

Max TCH Power (dBm) UL and DL Target (dB) per mobility The type of bearer.

For information on defining R99 radio bearers, refer to "Defining R99 Radio Bearers."

3.Modeling Services

Services are the various services available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched services. This section describes how to create a service. However, only the following parameters are used in predictions:

R99 bearer parameters Handover capabilities HSPA capabilities Body loss HSPA application throughput parameters

Before you can model services, you must have defined R99 bearers. For information on defining R99 radio bearers, refer to "Defining R99 Radio Bearers."

To create or modify a service, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Page 69: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-66 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Right-click the Services folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Services New Element Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service.

Some fields depend on the Type of service you choose. You can change the following parameters:

Name: The U-Net proposes a name for the new service, but you can change the name to something more descriptive.

R99 Radio Bearer: Choose an R99 radio bearer from the list. If you want to edit the settings of the chosen R99 radio bearer, click the Browse button ( ) to open the bearer’s Properties dialog box.

Type: You can choose either Circuit or Packet as the service type. If you want the service to be able to use HSDPA channels, choose Packet and the HSDPA check box. For packet services that can use HSDPA channels, you have the following options: − ADPCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink ADPCH activity factors (for

services that support HSDPA) are used to estimate the average power on A-DPCH channels.

− Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the requested average HS-PDSCH rate which guarantees a minimum average downlink rate during an HSDPA call. It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of HSDPA users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to be compared to the real obtained average throughput.

− Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.

If you want the service to be able to use HSUPA channels, choose Packet, the HSDPA check box, and the HSUPA check box. For packet services that can use HSUPA channels, you have the following options: − EDPCCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink EDPCCH activity factors (for

services that support HSUPA) are used to estimate the average power on EDPCCH channels.

− Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the requested average E-DPDCH rate which guarantees a minimum average uplink rate during an HSUPA call. It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of HSUPA users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to be compared to the real obtained average throughput.

− Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control)

Page 70: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-67

throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.

If you choose Packet to create R99-bearer packet services that do not use HSDPA or HSUPA, you have the following option: Efficiency Factor: The uplink and downlink efficiency factors are used to determine duration of usage by the user. It does this by determining the average usage of the network by the user.

If you choose Circuit, you have the following options. Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for each user when making a Monte-Carlo distribution for a power control simulation.

Carrier: You can choose one of the available carriers or all carriers. The specified carrier is considered in simulation when admitting a transmitter to the mobile active set. If the transmitter uses the specified carrier, the U-Net chooses it. Otherwise, it will choose another one, using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. The carrier specified for the service is not used in predictions (that is, AS analysis and coverage predictions). In predictions, the U-Net considers the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. If no particular carrier is specified in the service properties, it will consider the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties.

Soft Handoff Allowed: Choose the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if you want the network to be able to use soft handoff with this service.

Priority: Enter a priority for this service. "0" is the lowest priority. Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of

the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3dB.

If you choose Circuit as the Type, continue to click if you choose Packet as the Type, an additional tab, the Packet tab, is displayed.

Step 5 Click the Packet tab.

In the Packet tab, you can set the following parameters for packet switched services:

Under Session, you can set: − Average Number of Packet Calls: Enter the average number of packet calls in the

uplink and downlink during one session. − Average Time Between Two Packet Calls: Enter the average time between two

packet calls (in milliseconds) in the uplink and downlink. Under Packet Calls, you can set:

− Min. Size (Kbytes): Enter the minimum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink.

− Max Size (Kbytes): Enter the maximum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink.

− Average Time Between Two Packets (ms): Enter the average time between two packets in milliseconds in the uplink and downlink.

Under Packet, you can set: Size (Bytes): Enter the packet size in bytes in the uplink and downlink.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Page 71: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-68 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

4.Creating a Mobility Type

In UMTS, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by a speed driver or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec/I0 requirements and Eb/Nt targets per radio bearer and per link (up and down) are largely dependent on mobile speed.

The following parameters are used in predictions:

Ec/I0 threshold HS-SCCH Ec/Nt Threshold

To create or modify a mobility type, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Right-click the Mobility Types folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu.

You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialog box: − Name: Enter or modify the descriptive name for the mobility type. − Average Speed: Enter or modify an average speed for the mobility type. This field is

for information only; the average speed is not used by any calculation. − Ec /I0 Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum Ec/I0 required from a transmitter to

enter the active set. This value must be verified for the best server. − HSSCCH Ec/Nt Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum quality required in order

for the HSDPA link to be available. This parameter is used by the U-Net to determine the HSSCCH power when the user has chosen dynamic allocation in the cell properties. For static allocation, the U-Net calculates the HSSCCH Ec/Nt from the HSSCCH power set in the cell properties and compares it to this threshold. This field is only used with HSDPA.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

5.Modeling Terminals

In UMTS, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device.

The following parameters are used in predictions:

Receiver equipment Maximum terminal power Gain and losses

Page 72: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-69

Noise figure Active set size DL rake factor Rho factor Compressed mode capability HSPA capability and HSPA-specific categories:

− UE category − MUD factor (for HSDPA only).

To create or modify a terminal, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Terminals folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Terminals New Element Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminal folder and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

You can modify the following parameters:

Name: You can change the name of the terminal. Reception Equipment: Choose a type of reception equipment from the list. You can

create a new type of reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table, right-click the Terminals folder in the UMTS Parameters folder on the Data tab and choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.

Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission power makes up the dynamic range for uplink power control.

Max Power: Set the maximum transmission power. Gain: Set the antenna gain. Losses: Set the reception losses. Noise Figure: Set the terminal noise figure, Active Set Size: Set the active set size. The active set size is the maximum number of

transmitters to which a terminal can be connected at one time. DL Rake Factor: Set the DL rake factor. This enables the U-Net to model the rake

receiver on DL.

Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in uplink has to be set in the site equipment properties. For information on setting site equipment properties, refer to "Creating Site Equipment."

Rho factor (%): This parameter enables the U-Net to take into account the self-interference produced by the terminal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which affects, in turn, the output signal. This

Page 73: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-70 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, the U-Net considers that the transmitted energy is not 100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment, that is, self-interference. The U-Net considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the uplink.

Compressed Mode: Check the Compressed Mode check box if the terminal uses compressed mode. Compressed mode is generally used to prepare hard-handover of users with single receiver terminals.

Step 6 Click the HSDPA/HSUPA tab.

Under HSDPA, you can modify the following parameters:

HSDPA supported: Check the HSDPA supported check box if the terminal is able to use HSDPA channels.

UE Category: Choose a user equipment category. HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardized into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.

MUD Factor: Enter a multi-user detection factor (MUD). MUD is based on an algorithm used to improve mobile receiver capacity. It reduces intra-cell interference and allows for higher Ec /Nt. MUD is modeled by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in calculating DL interference. If MUD is not supported, enter "0."

If you have chosen the HSDPA supported check box, you can modify the following parameters under HSDPA:

HSUPA supported: Check the HSUPA supported check box if the terminal is able to use HSUPA channels.

UE Category: Choose a user equipment category. HSUPA user equipment capabilities are standardized into 6 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

6.Defining the RSCP Threshold

To define the minimum pilot RSCP threshold, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click on the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Predictions Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Predictions tab.

Step 5 Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min Pilot RSCP Threshold.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

7.Making Quality Studies

Page 74: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-71

In the U-Net, you can make several predictions to study the quality. In this section, the following quality predictions are described:

8.Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction 9.Studying Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink or Uplink 10.Studying Effective Service Area 11.Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators

A table listing quality indicators (BER and BLER) to be analyzed is available. Quality studies proposed by the U-Net depend on quality indicators specified in this table.

8.Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction

A pilot signal quality prediction enables you to identify areas where there is at least one transmitter whose pilot quality is received sufficiently well to be added to the probe mobile active set.

The U-Net calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it compares this value either to the Ec/I0 threshold defined for the chosen mobility type, or to user-defined Ec/I0 thresholds. The pixel is colored if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the best Ec/I0 is higher than the Ec/I0 mobility threshold or specified Ec/I0 thresholds).

To make a pilot signal quality prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec/I0) and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the pilot signal quality prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which sites to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab shown in Figure 9-26.

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

Page 75: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-72 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Figure 9-26 Simulation settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Ec/I0 (dB)" is chosen by default. Each pixel is displayed in a color corresponding to the pilot signal quality.

You can also set parameters to display the following results:

Where at least one transmitter is in the active set: Choose "Unique" as the Display Type.

Where at least one transmitter is in the active set, with information on the best server: Choose "Discrete Value" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field.

The pilot quality relative to the Ec/I0 threshold: Choose "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Ec/I0 margin (dB)" as the Field.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot signal quality prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

9.Studying Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink or Uplink

Page 76: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-73

The U-Net calculates the traffic channel quality (as defined by Eb/Nt) when using the maximum power allowed. In the prediction, the downlink or uplink service area is limited by the maximum traffic channel power allowable per cell and by the pilot quality. If the received pilot is below the set threshold, the U-Net will not display the traffic channel quality. Mobile macro-diversity is taken in consideration to evaluate the traffic channel quality (Eb/Nt) at the probe mobile. The U-Net combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe mobile active set.

To make a prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose one of the following studies and click OK:

Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the service area (Eb/Nt) prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For a service area (Eb/Nt) prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max Eb/Nt (dB)" is chosen by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a color corresponding to the traffic channel quality.

You can also set parameters to display the following results:

The traffic channel quality relative to the Eb/Nt threshold: Choose "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Eb/Nt margin (dB)" as the Field.

Page 77: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-74 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The power required to reach the Eb/Nt threshold: Choose "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Required power (dB)" as the Field.

Where traffic channel quality exceeds the Eb/Nt threshold for each mobility type: On the Condition tab, choose "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set.

Step 8 Choice #4:Choose X to display areas where the traffic data rate carried in the downlink or uplink exceeds fixed thresholds. PERHAPS IN 2.6.0

Step 9 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 10 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb/Nt) prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

10.Studying Effective Service Area

The effective service area is the intersection zone between the pilot reception area, and the uplink and downlink service areas. In other words, the effective service area prediction calculates where a service actually is available for the probe mobile.

To make an effective service area prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Effective Service Area and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the effective service area prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

Page 78: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-75

If you want the effective service area prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

You can choose the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the effective service area prediction to take into consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled, the U-Net will consider only the lowest bearer.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For an effective service area prediction, the Display Type "Unique" is chosen by default. The coverage prediction will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

11.Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators

You can create a quality study based on a given quality indicators (BER, BLER, or FER). The coverage prediction will show for each pixel the measurement of the chosen quality indicator.

This type of coverage prediction is not available in the list of standard studies; you can, however, use quality indicators in a study by first ensuring that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set and then creating a coverage prediction, choosing display parameters that use these quality indicators.

Before you define the quality study, you must ensure that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set.

To check the parameters of the quality indicators, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Services folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Quality Indicators from the shortcut menu.

The Quality Indicators table is displayed.

For each quality indicator in the Name column, you can set the following parameters:

Used for Packet Services: Choose the Used for Packet Services if the quality indicator is to be used for packet services.

Page 79: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-76 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Used for Circuit Services: Choose the Used for Circuit Services if the quality indicator is to be used for circuit services.

Measured Parameter for QI: From the list, choose the parameter that will be measured to indicate quality.

QI Interpolation: Choose the QI Interpolation check box if you want the U-Net to interpolate between two existing QI values. Clear the QI Interpolation check box if you want the U-Net to take the closest QI value.

Step 5 Close the Quality Indicators table.

Step 6 In the UMTS Parameters folder, right-click the Terminals folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 7 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.

The Reception Equipment table is displayed.

"Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals.

Step 8 Double-click the reception equipment type for which you want to verify the correspondence between the measured quality and the quality indicator.

The reception equipment type’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 9 Click the Quality Graphs tab.

Step 10 Ensure that a Quality Indicator Mobilityhas been chosen for each R99 Bearer. You can edit the values in the DL and UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by choosing the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons.

Step 11 Click OK to close the reception equipment type’s Properties dialog box.

Once you have ensured that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set, you can use the measured quality to create a quality study. How you define a coverage prediction according to the measured quality indicator, depends several parameters:

The settings made in the Quality Indicators table The service you want to study The quality indicator you want to use (BER, BLER, or FER) The coverage prediction you want to use (Pilot Reception Analysis, the Service Area

Downlink, or Service Area Uplink).

In the following example, you will create a quality study showing BLER, for a user on foot and with mobile internet access.

----End

To create a quality study showing BLER for a user on foot and with mobile internet access, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

Page 80: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-77

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the service area (Eb/Nt) downlink prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

Terminal: Choose the appropriate terminal for mobile Internet access from the Terminal list.

Service: Choose "Mobile Internet Access" from the Service list. Mobility: Choose "Pedestrian" from the Mobility list. Carrier: If you want to study a certain carrier, you can choose it from the Carrier list.

Otherwise, choose "All."

If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) downlink prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

You can choose the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the service area (Eb/Nt) downlink prediction to take into consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled, the U-Net will consider only the lowest bearer.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

Choose "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "BLER" as the Field. The exact of the field value will depend on the name given in the Quality Indicators table. Click OK to save your settings.

Step 8 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

The U-Net calculates for each pixel the DL traffic channel quality (Eb/Nt) (provided when using the maximum traffic channel power allowed). Then, it deduces the corresponding BLER value from the quality graph (BLER=f(DL Eb/Nt)). The pixel is colored if the condition is fulfilled (that is, if BLER is evaluated as being higher than the specified threshold).

Page 81: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-78 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

12.Studying Noise

The U-Net has several predictions that enable you to study the downlink total noise, downlink noise rise or pilot pollution. In this section, the following noise predictions are described:

13.Studying Downlink Total Noise 14.Calculating Pilot Pollution

13.Studying Downlink Total Noise

In the downlink total noise prediction, the U-Net calculates and displays the areas where the downlink total noise or the downlink noise rise exceeds a set threshold.

To make a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Effective Service Area and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility.

If you want the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is chosen by default. The Field you choose determines which information the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction makes available.

Downlink total noise prediction: When making a downlink total noise prediction, choose one of the following in the Field list: − Min. noise level − Average noise level

Page 82: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-79

− Max noise level Downlink noise rise prediction: When making a downlink noise rise prediction, choose

one of the following in the Field list: − Min. noise rise − Average noise rise − Max noise rise

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

14.Calculating Pilot Pollution

A transmitter which fulfils all the criteria to enter a mobile’s active set but which is not admitted because the active set limit has already been reached is considered a polluter.

In the pilot pollution prediction, the U-Net calculates and displays the areas where the probe mobile is interfered by the pilot signal from polluter transmitters.

To make a pilot pollution prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Pilot Pollution and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the pilot pollution prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

Page 83: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-80 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

If you want the pilot pollution prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

For a pilot pollution prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of polluters" are chosen by default.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot pollution prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

----End

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

15.Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction

In the handoff status prediction, the U-Net calculates and displays the zones where a handover can be made. For a handover to be possible, there must be a potential active transmitter, that is, a transmitter that fulfils all the criteria to enter the mobile active set, and the service chosen by the user must be available.

You can also use the handover status coverage prediction to display the number of potential active transmitters.

To make a handover status coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Handoff Status and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the handover status coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a

Page 84: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-81

simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility.

If you want the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

The settings you choose on the Display tab determine the information that the prediction will display.

To display the handover status: − Choose "Discrete Values" from the Display Type list. − Choose "Status" from the Field list. The prediction will display two values: No

handoff and Not connected. To display the number of potential active transmitters:

− Choose "Value Intervals" from the Display Type list. − Choose "Potential active transmitter nb" from the Field list. The prediction will

display the number of potential active transmitters.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

16.Making an AS Analysis

The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you information on the pilot quality (Ec/I0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service.

You can make an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the AS analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map.

To make an AS analysis, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar.

The Point Analysis window is displayed (see Figure 9-26).

Page 85: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-82 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 2 Click the AS Analysis tab.

Step 3 At the top of the AS Analysis tab, choose "None" from Simulation.

Step 4 If you are making an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the prediction:

1. Choose the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction. 2. Right-click the Point Analysis window and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed. − Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. − Choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge

Coverage Probability, and, choose "Ec/I0" from the Shadowing Margin list. − Choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are

defined per clutter class. 3. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

Step 5 Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer.

As you move the pointer, the U-Net indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 9-27).

Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 9-28 for an explanation of the displayed information.

Figure 9-27 Point analysis on the map

Step 6 Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position.

To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position.

Step 7 Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.

Page 86: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-83

Figure 9-28 AS Analysis tab

The pilot reception in terms of active set components for the setconditions. The active set is displayed in grey. Solid barsindicate the transmitters which respect the active setconstraints. Even if more transmitters respect the constraints,the active set size is limited to the number defined in the terminalproperties and is a function of the current service.

The connection status (pilot and uplinkand downlink traffic) for the current poin

: successful connection

: failed connection

This vertical bar represents the lower boundary of active set (defined as the signal value of the bestserver at the current point minus the AS_Thresholdefined in the global properties from theTransmittersfolder).

This vertical barrepresents the Ec/I0threshold become thebest server (thresholddefined in the mobilitytype properties dialogue).

Select the load conditions (DL Powerand UL Load from a simulation oruser-defined values) to use in thisanalysis.

Select the parameters of the probe user tobe studied.

----End

The bar graph displays the following information:

The pilot quality (Ec/I0) reception of all transmitters using the chosen carrier (the color of the bar color corresponds to the color of the transmitter on the map).

The thresholds of the active set (Ec/I0 threshold, (Ec/I0) best server active set threshold). The portion of the graph with the grey background indicates the transmitters in the active set.

The pilot and the availability of service on UL and DL.

If there is at least one successful connection (for pilot, downlink, or uplink), double-clicking the icons in the right-hand frame will open a dialog box with additional information.

HSDPA Coverage Prediction The HSDPA coverage prediction allows you to study many HSDPA-related parameters, depending on the parameters defined. The parameters used as input for the HSDPA coverage prediction are the HSDPA power, and the total transmitted power for each cell. If the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, these values are taken from the cell properties. For information about the cell parameters, refer to "3.Creating or Modifying a Cell." For information on the formulas used to calculate different throughputs, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

To make an HSDPA coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose HSDPA Study and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Page 87: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-84 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the HSDPA coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the HSDPA power, the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

You must choose a Mobility. For an HSDPA coverage prediction, "HSDPA Terminal" is chosen as the Terminal and "HSDPA" is chosen as the Service.

If you want to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

The settings you choose on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display.

To analyze the uplink and downlink A-DPCH qualities on the map: − The maximum DL A-DPCH quality relative to the Eb/Nt threshold: Choose

"Max ADPCH Eb/Nt DL (dB)" as the Field. The U-Net determines downlink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum traffic channel power allowed for the best server.

− The maximum UL A-DPCH quality relative to the Eb/Nt threshold: Choose "Max ADPCH Eb/Nt UL (dB)" as the Field. The U-Net determines uplink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum terminal power allowed.

To analyze the HS-SCCH quality or power: − The HS-SCCH power per HS-SCCH channel relative to the power threshold:

Choose "HS-SCCH Power (dBm)" as the Field. This display option is relevant only if HS-SCCH power is allocated dynamically.

− The HS-SCCH Ec/Nt per HS-SCCH channel relative to the Ec/Nt threshold: Choose "HS-SCCH Ec/Nt (dBm)" as the Field. This display option is relevant only if HS-SCCH power is allocated statically.

To model fast link adaptation for a single HSDPA user or for a defined number of HSDPA users: For a single HSDPA user, the U-Net considers one HSDPA user on each pixel and determines the best HSDPA bearer that the user can obtain by considering the entire available HSDPA power of the cell.

The HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt relative to the Ec/Nt threshold: Choose "HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt" as the Field. The U-Net calculates the best HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt on each pixel.

The channel quality indicator (CQI) relative to the Ec/Nt threshold: Choose "CQI" as the Field. The U-Net displays either the CPICH CQI or the HS-PDSCH CQI, depending on the option chosen under HSDPA on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitter Properties dialog box. The MAC rate relative to the threshold: Choose

Page 88: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-85

"MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. The U-Net calculates the MAC rate from the transport block size of the chosen HSDPA bearer.

The MAC throughput relative to the threshold: Choose "MAC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. The MAC throughput is calculated from the MAC rate.

The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Choose "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. The U-Net displays the RLC peak rate that the chosen HSDPA bearer can by supplied with. The RLC peak rate is a characteristic of the HSDPA bearer.

The RLC peak throughput relative to the threshold: Choose "RLC Peak Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. The U-Net calculates the RLC peak throughput from the RLC peak rate.

The average RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Choose "Average RLC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field.

The application throughput relative to the threshold: Choose "Application Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset, the U-Net calculates the application throughput. The application throughput represents the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead and addressing).

The U-Net can consider several HSDPA users per pixel. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, this value is taken from the cell properties. The U-Net considers the defined number of HSDPA users on each pixel and determines the best HSDPA bearer that each user can obtain. The HSDPA power of the cell is shared between the HSDPA users. You can display the following results:

The RLC throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Choose "RLC Throughput per Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. The U-Net calculates the RLC throughput per mobile from the peak throughput of each user.

For information on choosing the best bearer, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

----End

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

Each HSDPA user is associated to an R99 dedicated channel A-DCH, in the uplink and downlink. Therefore, user must first initiate an A-DCH connection in order to be able to use HSDPA channels. To manage this R99 connection, the HSDPA service is linked to an R99 bearer.

HSUPA Coverage Prediction The HSUPA coverage prediction allows you to study several HSUPA-related parameters. The parameters used as input for the HSUPA study are the uplink load factor the uplink reuse factor, the uplink load factor due to HSUPA and the maximum uplink load factor for each cell. If the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, these values are taken from the cell properties. For information about the cell parameters, refer to "3.Creating or Modifying a

Page 89: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-86 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Cell." For information on the formulas used to calculate required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, required terminal power and different throughputs, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

To make an HSUPA coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose HSUPA Study and click OK.

The prediction Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the HSUPA coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to choose which base stations to study.

Step 6 Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9-26).

When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you can choose which simulations you will be using on this tab. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation. Therefore, choose "(None)" from Simulation. The U-Net then calculates the prediction using the uplink load factor, the uplink reuse factor, the uplink load factor due to HSUPA and the maximum uplink load defined in the cell properties.

You must choose Mobility. For an HSUPA coverage prediction, "HSUPA Terminal" is chosen as the Terminal and "HSUPA" is chosen as the Service.

HSUPA Resources: the U-Net can calculate the HSUPA coverage prediction in one of two ways:

For a single user: After allocating capacity to all R99 users, the entire remaining load will be allocated to a single HSUPA user.

Shared by HSUPA users defined or calculated per cell: After allocating capacity to all R99 users, the remaining load of the cell will be shared equally between all the HSUPA users. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, the number of HSUPA users is taken from the cell properties. The displayed results of the coverage prediction will be for one user. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 7 Click the Display tab.

The settings you choose on the Display tab determine the information that the prediction will display. You can set parameters to display the following results:

The required EDPDCH Ec/Nt relative to the threshold: Choose "Required EDPDCH Ec/Nt (dB)" as the Field. The U-Net chooses the best HSUPA bearer whose required

Page 90: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-87

EDPDCH Ec/Nt does not exceed the maximum EDPDCH Ec/Nt allowed. The required EDPDCH Ec/Nt is a property of the chosen HSUPA bearer.

The power required for the chosen terminal relative to the threshold: Choose "Required Terminal Power (dBm)" as the Field. The U-Net calculates the required terminal power from the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt.

The MAC Rate relative to the threshold: Choose "MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. The U-Net calculates the MAC rate from the transport block size of the chosen HSUPA bearer.

The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Choose "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. The U-Net displays the RLC peak rate that the chosen HSUPA bearer can supply. The RLC peak rate is a property of the HSUPA bearer.

The guaranteed RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Choose "Minimum RLC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field.

The application throughput relative to the threshold: Choose "Application Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSUPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset, the U-Net calculates the application throughput. The application throughput represents the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead and addressing). For information on choosing the best bearer, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

Step 8 Click OK to save your settings.

Step 9 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

----End

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you may want to save the results displayed on the map in an external format, either by printing the coverage prediction results, or by saving the results in an external format. You can also export a chosen area of the coverage as a bitmap.

1.Printing Coverage Prediction Results

The U-Net offers several options allowing you to customize and optimize the printed coverage prediction results. The U-Net supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0.

Before you print coverage prediction results, you have the following options:

You can print the entire map, or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: − Choosing the print area − Creating a focus zone

You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout. You can see how the map will appear once printed.

Page 91: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-88 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Important:

Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. Before printing for the first time, you should review the "Printing Recommendations" to avoid any memory-related problems.

To print coverage prediction results, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose the document window containing the coverage prediction results.

Step 2 You now have the following options before printing:

You can choose a print area or create a focus zone. You can modify the print layout. You can see how the map will appear once printed.

Step 3 Choose File > Print.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.Defining a Coverage Export Zone

If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, the U-Net will offer you the option of exporting the only the area covered by the zone if you export the coverage prediction as a raster image.

To define a coverage export zone, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Coverage Export Zone folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Draw from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Draw the coverage export zone:

− Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone.

− Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone. When you release the mouse, the coverage export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners.

The coverage export zone is displayed as a rectangle with a light purple border.

----End

Important:

The coverage export zone can only export in raster format. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.

3.Exporting Coverage Prediction Results

Page 92: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-89

In the U-Net, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in BMP, TIFF, or ArcView© grid or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) raster formats or in ArcView©, MapInfo©m or AGD vector formats. Exporting coverage predictions allows the user to generate a file that can be imported as a vector or raster object in the U-Net or in another application. For each exported prediction (total or for a transmitter), the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. All coverage types can be exported, however, you can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). In this case, only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.

To export prediction coverage, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the button to expand the Predictions folder.

----End

The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. You can export the entire coverage prediction, the coverage export zone, or part of the coverage prediction.

To export the entire coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.

To export the coverage export zone: − Define The coverage export zone − Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.

To export part of the coverage prediction: − Click the button to expand the coverage prediction. − Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export.

Step 2 Choose Export the Coverage from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Enter the file name and choose the type and the path of the file to be exported.

Step 4 Click Save to export the prediction coverage results.

If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in raster format, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the coverage prediction, The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone, or The Coverage Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the coverage export zone. − If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in

AGD format:

If desired, change the export resolution. The default resolution is the resolution of the prediction coverage results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialog box).

If desired, change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported.

Click Export to finish exporting the prediction coverage results.

Page 93: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-90 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

When choosing a different coordinate system than the one initially defined within the U-Net, the file

is converted using the chosen coordinate system. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example,

coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.

----End

9.1.11 Planning Neighbors You can set neighbors for each cell manually, or you can let the U-Net automatically allocate neighbors, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbors, the cell to which you are allocating neighbors is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbors are referred to as possible neighbors. When allocating neighbors to all active and filtered transmitters, the U-Net allocates neighbors only to the cells within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbors all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, the U-Net allocates neighbors only to the cells within the computation zone.

Usually, you will allocate neighbors globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbors to base stations as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window.

The U-Net supports the following neighbor types in a UMTS network:

Intra-technology neighbors: Intra-technology neighbors are cells defined as neighbors and both use UMTS. Intra-technology neighbors can be divided into: − Intra-carrier neighbors: Cells defined as neighbors which perform handover using

the same carrier. − Inter-carrier neighbors: Cells defined as neighbors which perform handover using a

different carrier. Inter-technology neighbors: Inter-technology neighbors are cells defined as

neighbors that use a technology other than UMTS.

In this section, the following are described:

Defining Exceptional Pairs Allocating Neighbors Automatically Checking Automatic Allocation Results Importing Neighbors Allocating and Deleting Neighbors per Cell Checking the Consistency of the Neighbor Allocation Plan Exporting Neighbors

Defining Exceptional Pairs In the U-Net, you can define neighbor constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbors. Exceptional pairs are not taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbors.

To define exceptional pairs of neighbors, perform the following steps:

Page 94: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-91

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.

The Cells table is displayed.

Step 4 Right-click on the cell for which you want to define neighbor constraints.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 5 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The cell’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click the Intra-technology Neighbors tab.

Step 7 Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ):

1. Choose the cell from the list in the Neighbors column. 2. In the Status column, choose one of the following:

− Forced: The chosen cell will always be a neighbor of the reference cell. − Forbidden: The chosen cell will never be a neighbor of the reference cell.

Step 8 Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair.

Step 9 Click OK.

You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbors table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and choosing Cells > Neighbors > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.

----End

Allocating Neighbors Automatically The U-Net can automatically allocate both intra and inter-carrier neighbors in a UMTS network. The U-Net allocates neighbors based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbor Allocation dialog box.

To automatically allocate intra-carrier UMTS neighbors, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Neighbors > Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.

The Automatic Neighbor Allocation dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Intra-Carrier Neighbors tab.

You can set the following parameters:

Page 95: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-92 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbor.

Max. Number of Neighbors: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbors that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table.

Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbor. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialog box, you can change the following parameters: − Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be

provided by reference cell A and possible neighbor cell B. − Min. Ec/I0: Enter the minimum Ec/I0 which must be provided by reference cell A in

an overlapping area. Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the overlapping area.

− Ec/I0 Margin: Enter the maximum difference of Ec/I0 between reference cell A and possible neighbor cell B in the overlapping area.

− Power Contributing to I0: You can let the U-Net base the interference ratio on the Total Power Used (as defined in the cell properties) or on a percentage of the maximum power (% Max Power).

− Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.

% Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbor cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.

Step 5 Choose the desired calculation parameters:

Force co-site cells as neighbors: Choose the Force co-site cells as neighbors check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbors.

Force adjacent cells as neighbors: Choose the Force adjacent cells as neighbors check box if you want cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbors. A cell is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cell’s coverage area where the possible neighbor cell is the best server, or where the possible neighbor cell is the second best server in the reference cell’s active set (respecting the handover margin).

Force symmetry: Choose the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbor relationships to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbor to all of the cells that are its neighbors. If the neighbor list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbor and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbors of the reference cell.

Force exceptional pairs: Choose the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbor relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table.

Reset neighbors: Choose the Reset neighbors check box if you want the U-Net to delete all current neighbors when allocating neighbors. If you do not choose the Reset neighbors check box, the U-Net will not delete any existing neighbors when automatically allocating neighbors; it will only add new neighbors to the list.

Step 6 Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbors:

Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbor being admitted for coverage reasons.

Page 96: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-93

Adjacency Factor: If you have chosen the Force adjacent cells as neighbors check box, set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbor cell being adjacent to the reference cell.

Co-site Factor: If you have chosen the Force co-site cells as neighbors check box in, set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbor cell being located on the same site as reference cell.

Step 7 Click Run.

The U-Net begins the process of allocating intra-carrier neighbors. The U-Net first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbors. If the path loss matrices are not valid, the U-Net recalculates them.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating neighbors, the new neighbors are visible under Results. The U-Net only displays new neighbors. If no new neighbors have been found and if the Reset neighbors check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty.

The Results table contains the following information.

Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbors allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbors that the reference cell can

have. Neighbor: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbor to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options. Cause: The reason the U-Net has allocated the possible neighbor cell, as identified in the

Neighbor column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. − Co-site − Adjacency − Symmetry − Coverage − Existing

Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbor overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometers.

Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometers, where the neighbor cell is best server or second best server.

Step 8 Choose the Commit check box for each neighbor you want to assign to a cell.

You can use many of the U-Net’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting.

Step 9 Click Commit.

All the neighbors whose Commit check box is chosen are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbors are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbors tab of each cell’s Properties dialog box.

----End

To automatically allocate inter-carrier UMTS neighbors, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

Page 97: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-94 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Neighbors > Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.

The Automatic Neighbor Allocation dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Inter-Carrier Neighbors tab.

You can set the following parameters:

Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbor.

Max. Number of Neighbors: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbors that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table.

Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbor. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialog box, you can change the following parameters: − Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be

provided by reference cell A and possible neighbor cell B. − Min. Ec/I0: Enter the minimum Ec/I0 which must be provided by reference cell A

and possible neighbor B in an overlapping area. Possible neighbor B must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the overlapping area.

− Ec/I0 Margin: Enter the Ec/I0 margin relative to the Ec/I0 of the reference cell A. Refer to the Technical Reference Guide for an explanation of how the Ec/I0 margin is used in different inter-carrier handover scenarios.

− Power Contributing to I0: You can let the U-Net base the interference ratio on the Total Power Used (as defined in the cell properties) or on a percentage of the maximum power (% Max Power).

− Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.

% Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbor cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.

Step 5 Choose the desired calculation parameters:

Force co-site cells as neighbors: Choose the Force co-site cells as neighbors check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbors.

Force symmetry: Choose the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbor relationships to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbor to all of the cells that are its neighbors. If the neighbor list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbor and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbors of the reference cell.

Force exceptional pairs: Choose the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbor relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table.

Reset neighbors: Choose the Reset neighbors check box if you want the U-Net to delete all current neighbors when allocating neighbors. If you do not choose the Reset neighbors check box, the U-Net will not delete any existing neighbors when automatically allocating neighbors; it will only add new neighbors to the list.

Step 6 Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbors:

Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of the minimum percentage of shared coverage between the possible neighbor cell and the reference cell.

Page 98: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-95

Co-site Factor: If you have chosen the Force co-site cells as neighbors check box, set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbor cell being located on the same site as reference cell.

Step 7 Click Run.

The U-Net begins the process of allocating inter-carrier neighbors. The U-Net first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbors. If the path loss matrices are not valid, the U-Net recalculates them.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating neighbors, the new neighbors are visible under Results. The U-Net only displays new neighbors. If no new neighbors have been found and if the Reset neighbors check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty.

The Results table contains the following information.

Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbors allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbors that the reference cell can

have. Neighbor: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbor to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options. Cause: The reason the U-Net has allocated the possible neighbor cell, as identified in the

Neighbor column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. − Co-site − Symmetry − Coverage − Existing

Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbor overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometers.

Step 8 Choose the Commit check box for each neighbor you want to assign to a cell.

You can use many of the U-Net’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting.

Step 9 Click Commit.

All the neighbors whose Commit check box is chosen are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbors are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbors tab of each cell’s Properties dialog box.

A forbidden neighbor will not be listed as a neighbor unless the neighbor relation already exists and

the Reset neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, the U-Net displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbor will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbor already exists.

When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are chosen, the U-Net considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbor relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, the U-Net displays a warning in the Event Viewer.

Area percentages are calculated with the resolution specified in the Predictions folder Properties dialog box.

You can save automatic neighbor allocation parameters in a user configuration.

----End

Page 99: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-96 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

1.Allocating Neighbors to a New Base Station

When you create a new base station, you can let the U-Net allocate neighbors to it automatically. The U-Net considers the cells of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the cells of the new base station.

To allocate neighbors to a new base station, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site.

Step 2 In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Neighbors > Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.

The Automatic Neighbor Allocation dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Define the automatic neighbor allocation parameters.

----End

Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbor allocation in the following ways:

1.Displaying Neighbor Relations on the Map 2.Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbor of a Cell

1.Displaying Neighbor Relations on the Map

You can view neighbor relations directly on the map. The U-Net can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbor relation (in other words, the U-Net indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbor) and whether the neighbor relation is symmetric.

To display the neighbor relations of a cell on the map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the menu button ( ) of the Neighbor Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Display Options from the shortcut menu.

The Neighbor Display dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Choose which neighbor links to display:

Outwards Non-Symmetric: Choose the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbor relations where the chosen cell is the reference cell and where the neighbor relation is not symmetric.

Inwards Non-Symmetric: Choose the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbor relations where the chosen cell is neighbor and where the neighbor relation is not symmetric.

Symmetric: Choose the Symmetric check box to display neighbor relations that are symmetric between the chosen cell and the neighbor.

Carrier: Because neighbor relations are between cells, you must choose the carrier of the cells.

Step 4 Click the menu button ( ) of the Neighbor Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

Page 100: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-97

The menu is displayed.

Step 5 Choose Neighbors from the menu.

The neighbors of a cell will be displayed when you choose a transmitter.

Step 6 Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbor relations.

The U-Net displays the following information shown in Figure 9-29 on the chosen carrier:

The symmetric neighbor relations of the chosen (reference) transmitter are indicated by a heavy black line.

The outward neighbor relations are indicated with a light black line with an arrow the color of the chosen (reference) transmitter.

The inward neighbor relations are indicated with a light black line with an arrow the color of the transmitter which has the chosen (reference) transmitter as a neighbor.

Figure 9-29 Neighbors of Site 22(0)

You can use the same procedure to display either forced neighbors or forbidden neighbors by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Neighbor Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and choosing either Forced Neighbors or Forbidden Neighbors.

----End

2.Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbor of a Cell

By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbor display options, the U-Net can display the coverage areas of a cell’s neighbors and color them according to any neighbor characteristic available in the Neighbors table.

To display the coverage of each neighbor of a cell, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by transmitter" prediction, with The Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and The Field set to Transmitter.

Step 2 Click the menu button ( ) of the Neighbor Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

Page 101: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-98 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 3 Choose Display Options from the shortcut menu.

The Neighbor Display dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Display Links list.

Step 5 The Intra-technology Neighbor Display dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 From the Display Type list, choose one of the following:

Unique: Choose "Unique" as the Display Type if you want the U-Net to color the coverage areas of a cell’s neighbors with a unique color.

Discrete Values: Choose "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want the U-Net to color the coverage areas of a cell’s neighbors according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbors table.

Value Intervals: Choose "Value Intervals" to color the coverage areas of a cell’s neighbors according the value interval of the value chosen from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbors according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.

Step 7 From the Tip Text list, choose the neighbor characteristics to be displayed in the tool tip.

The information will be displayed on each coverage area.

Step 8 In order to restore colors and cancel the neighbor display, click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( ).

Only intra-carrier neighbor coverage areas are displayed.

----End

Importing Neighbors You can import neighbor data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current U-Net document using the Neighbors table.

To import neighbors using the Neighbors table, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Open the Neighbors table:

1. Choose the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The shortcut menu is displayed. 3. Choose Cells > Neighbors > Intra-technology Neighbors from the shortcut menu. The

Neighbors table is displayed.

Step 2 Import the ASCII text file.

----End

Allocating and Deleting Neighbors per Cell Although you can let the U-Net allocate neighbors automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbors by allocating or deleting neighbors per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbors directly on the map or using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialog box.

Page 102: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-99

To allocate or delete UMTS neighbors using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialog box, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbors you want to change.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The transmitter’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the Cells tab.

Step 4 On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. Click the Browse button ( ) beside Neighbors in the cell for which you want to allocate or delete neighbors. The cell’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the Intra-technology Neighbors tab.

Step 6 If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbors in the following boxes:

Man Number Inter-Carrier Man Number Intra-Carrier

Step 7 To allocate a new neighbor:

1. Under List, choose the cell from the list in the Neighbor column in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).

2. If you want the neighbor relation to be symmetric, choose the check box in the Symmetric column.

The U-Net automatically sets the importance for manually allocated neighbors to "1."

3. If you want to force hard handover, choose the check box in the Forced Hard Handover column.

4. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair.

Step 8 To delete a neighbor:

1. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbor to choose the entire row. 2. Press DEL to delete the neighbor.

Step 9 Click OK.

----End

1.Allocating or Deleting Neighbors Using the Neighbors Table

To allocate or delete UMTS neighbors using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialog box, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Neighbors > Intra-technology Neighbors from the shortcut menu.

The Neighbors table is displayed.

Page 103: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-100 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 4 To allocate a neighbor:

1. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), choose a reference cell in the Cell column.

2. Choose the neighbor in the Neighbor column. 3. Choose the check box in the Symmetry column if you want the neighbor relation to be

symmetric. 4. Click another cell of the table to create the new neighbor and add a new blank row to the

table. When the new neighbor is created, the U-Net automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbor and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1."

Step 5 To create a symmetric neighbor relation:

1. Choose the neighbor in the Neighbor column. The shortcut menu is displayed.

2. Choose Symmetrise from the shortcut menu. A symmetric neighbor relation is created between the cell in the Neighbor column and the cell in the Cell column.

Step 6 To make all neighbor relation symmetric, right-click the Neighbors table and choose Symmetrise All Neighbor Relations.

Step 7 To delete a symmetric neighbor relation:

1. Choose the neighbor in the Neighbor column. The shortcut menu is displayed.

2. Choose Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the shortcut menu. The symmetric neighbor relation between the cell in the Neighbor column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted.

Step 8 To delete a neighbor:

1. Click the left margin of the table row containing the neighbor to choose the entire row. 2. Press DEL to delete the neighbor.

----End

2.Allocating or Deleting Neighbors on the Map

You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbors directly on the map using the mouse.

To add or remove intra-technology neighbors using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbors on the map.

To add a symmetric neighbor relation, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the reference transmitter on the map.

The U-Net displays its neighbor relations.

Step 2 Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbor relation.

The U-Net adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbors list.

----End

Page 104: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-101

To remove a symmetric neighbor relation, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the reference transmitter on the map.

The U-Net displays its neighbor relations.

Step 2 Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbors.

The U-Net removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbors.

----End

To add an outward neighbor relation, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the reference transmitter on the map.

The U-Net displays its neighbor relations.

Step 2 Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbor relation.

The U-Net adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbor list of the reference transmitter.

----End

To remove an outward neighbor relation, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the reference transmitter on the map.

The U-Net displays its neighbor relations.

Step 2 Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbors.

The U-Net removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbors list of the reference transmitter.

----End

To add an inward neighbor relation: click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighbor relations.

If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbor relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. The U-Net converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbor relation.

If there is no existing neighbor relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbor relation between the two transmitters, and then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. The U-Net converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbor relation.

To remove an inwards neighbor relation, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the reference transmitter on the map.

The U-Net displays its neighbor relations.

Step 2 Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbors.

The U-Net removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbors list of the reference transmitter.

Page 105: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-102 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

You can use the same procedure to add or delete either forced neighbors or forbidden neighbors by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Neighbor Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and choosing either Forced Neighbors or Forbidden Neighbors.

----End

Checking the Consistency of the Neighbor Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbor allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbor allocation plan, the U-Net lists the results in a .txt file. You can define what information the U-Net provides in the audit.

To perform an audit of the neighbor allocation plan, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Neighbors > Audit from the shortcut menu.

The Neighbor Audit dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Define the parameters of the audit:

Neighborhood type: Choose whether you want to perform an audit on Intra-Carrier or Inter-Carrier neighbor relations.

Average No. of Neighbors: The average number of neighbors per cell Empty Lists: Which cells have no neighbors (in other words, which cells have an empty

neighbor list) Full Lists: Which cells having the maximum number of neighbors allowed (in other

words, which cells have a full neighbor list) Lists > Max Number: Which cells having more than the maximum number of

neighbors allowed Missing Co-sites: Which cells have no co-site neighbors Missing Symmetrics: Which cells have non-symmetric neighbor relations Exceptional Pairs: Which cells have forced neighbors or forbidden neighbors.

Step 5 Click OK to perform the audit.

The U-Net displays the results of the audit in a new text file:

Average number of neighbors: X; where, X is the average number of neighbors (integer) per cell for the plan audited.

Empty lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbors (or empty neighbors list) Syntax: |CELL|

Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbors listed in their respective neighbors lists. Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|

Lists > max number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbors listed in their respective neighbors lists.

Page 106: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-103

Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|

If the field ‘Maximum number of neighbors’ in the Transmitters table is empty, the above two checks take into account the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialog box.

Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbors in the audited neighbor plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOR|

Non symmetric links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbor links in the audited neighbor plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOR| |TYPE| |REASON|

Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbors missing in the audited neighbor plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOR|

Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbors existing in the audited neighbor plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOR| |TYPE| |REASON|

----End

Exporting Neighbors The neighbor data for a U-Net document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbor data to use it in another application or in another U-Net document.

To export neighbor data, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Neighbors and then choose the neighbor table containing the data you want to export from the shortcut menu:

Neighbors: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-carrier) neighbors in the current U-Net document.

Exceptional Pairs of Intra-technology Neighbors: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current U-Net document.

Step 4 When the chosen neighbors table opens, you can export the content.

----End

9.1.12 Planning Scrambling Codes In UMTS, 512 scrambling codes are available, numbered from 0 to 511. Although UMTS scrambling codes are displayed in decimal format by default, they can also be displayed and calculated in hexadecimal format, in other words using the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F.

The U-Net facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create groups of scrambling codes and domains, where each domain is a defined set of groups.

Page 107: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-104 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

You can also assign scrambling codes manually or automatically to any cell in the network.

Once allocation is completed, you can audit the scrambling codes, view scrambling code reuse on the map, and made an analysis of scrambling code distribution.

To plan scrambling codes for a UMTS project, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Prepare for scrambling code allocation

1. Define the scrambling code format. 2. Create scrambling code domains and groups. 3. Define exceptional pairs for scrambling code allocation.

Step 2 Allocate scrambling codes

1. Automatically allocate scrambling codes to UMTS cells. 2. Allocate scrambling codes to UMTS cells manually. 3. Checking the consistency of the scrambling code plan.

Step 3 Display the allocation of scrambling codes.

1. Use the search tool to display scrambling code allocation. 2. Display scrambling code allocation using transmitter display settings. 3. Group transmitters by scrambling codes. 4. Display the scrambling code allocation histogram. 5. Make a scrambling code interference zone prediction.

Within the context of primary scrambling code allocation, "neighbors" refer to intra-carrier

neighbors. According to 3GPP specifications, the 512 possible scrambling codes can be broken down into

groups, each containing 8 codes. Because the term "group" in the U-Net refers to user-defined sets of scrambling codes, these groups of 8 codes each are referred to as "clusters" in the U-Net. As well, the U-Net allows you to change the number of codes in a cluster.

----End

Defining the Scrambling Code Format Scrambling codes may be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal format. The chosen format is used to display scrambling codes in dialog boxs and tables such as in the Domains and Groups tables, the Cells table, and the Scrambling Code Allocation dialog box.

The decimal format is the default format in the U-Net. The accepted decimal values are from 0 to 511. The decimal format is also used, even if you have chosen the hexadecimal format, to store scrambling codes in the database and to display scrambling code distribution or the results of a scrambling code audit.

The hexadecimal format uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F for its base characters. In the U-Net, hexadecimal values are indicated by a lower-case "h" following the value. For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" is "63" as a decimal value. You can convert a hexadecimal value to a decimal value with the following equation, where A, B, and C are decimal values within the hexadecimal index ranges:

A 162× B 16 C+×+

For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" would be calculated as shown below:

Page 108: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-105

0 162× 3 16 15 63=+×+

To define the scrambling code format for a U-Net document, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Format from the shortcut menu and choose either Decimal or Hexadecimal.

----End

Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups The U-Net facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create domains, each containing groups of scrambling codes.

The procedure for managing scrambling codes in a UMTS document consists of the following steps:

Creating a scrambling code domain, as described in this section. Creating groups, each containing a range of scrambling codes, and assigning them to a

domain, as described in this section. Assigning a scrambling code domain to a cell or cells. If there is no scrambling code

domain, the U-Net will consider all 512 possible scrambling codes when assigning codes.

To create a scrambling code domain, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Domains.

The Domains table is displayed.

Step 4 In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter a Name for the new domain.

Step 5 Click in another cell of the table to create the new domain and add a new blank row to the table.

Step 6 Double-click the domain to which you want to add a group.

The domain’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Under Groups, enter the following information for each group you want to create.

Name: Enter a name for the new scrambling code group. Min.: Enter the lowest available primary scrambling code in this group's range.

The minimum and maximum scrambling codes must be entered in the format, decimal or hexadecimal, set for The U-Net document.

Max: Enter the highest available primary scrambling code in this group’s range. Step: Enter the separation interval between each primary scrambling code.

Page 109: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-106 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Excluded: Enter the scrambling codes in this range that you do not want to use. Extra: Enter any additional scrambling codes (that is, outside the range defined by the

Min. and Max fields) you want to add to this group. You can enter a list of codes separated by a comma, semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of scrambling codes separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3-5" means that the extra scrambling codes are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5."

Step 8 Click in another cell of the table to create the new group and add a new blank row to the table.

----End

Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same primary scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs. Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbors, reuse distance, and domains, in allocating scrambling codes.

To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same scrambling code, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Exceptional Pairs.

The Exceptional Separation Constraints table is displayed.

Step 4 In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), choose one cell of the new exceptional pair in the Cell column and the second cell of the new exceptional pair from the Cell_2 column.

Step 5 Click in another cell of the table to create the new exceptional pair and add a new blank row to the table.

----End

Allocating Scrambling Codes In a U-Net UMTS document, you allocate scrambling codes to cells by creating domains, with each domain containing one or more groups of scrambling codes. This combination of groups and domains defines which scrambling codes can be used for the cell.

You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same primary scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs.

The U-Net can automatically assign scrambling codes to the cells of a UMTS network according to set parameters. For example, it takes into account the definition of groups and domains of scrambling codes, the chosen scrambling code allocation strategy (clustered, distributed per cell, distributed per site and one cluster per site), minimum code reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbors.

1.Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells

The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate primary scrambling code to cells in the current network. You can choose among several automatic allocation strategies (for more information, refer to the Technical Reference Guide):

Page 110: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-107

Clustered: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling codes among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, the U-Net will preferentially allocate all the codes from same cluster.

Distributed per cell allocation: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. The U-Net will preferentially allocate codes from different clusters.

One cluster per site: This strategy allocates one cluster to each base station, then, one code of the cluster to each cell of each base station. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, the U-Net reuses the clusters at another base station.

Distributed per site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each base station in the network, then, one cluster to each transmitter of the base station according to its azimuth and finally one code of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters per base station you have in your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy. When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, the U-Net reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another base station.

To automatically allocate primary scrambling codes, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation.

The Primary Scrambling Codes dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the following parameters in the Primary Scrambling Codes dialog box:

Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic scrambling code allocation. − Existing Neighbors: If you choose the Existing Neighbors check box, no cell will

be allocated the same scrambling code as any of its neighbors. The U-Net can only consider neighbor relations if neighbors have already been allocated.

− Second Order Neighbors: If you choose the Second Order Neighbors check box, no cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as any of its neighbors or any of its neighbors’ neighbors.

− Additional Ec/I0 Conditions: Choose the Additional Ec/I0 Conditions check box, if you want to set constraints related to Ec/I0 and then enter a Min. Ec/I0 and Ec/I0 Margin. If you wish you can also choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. If cells meet the Ec/I0 conditions to enter the reference cell’s active set, they will be not allocated the same scrambling code as the reference cell.

The U-Net takes into account the total downlink power used by the cell in order to evaluate I0. I0 equals the sum of total transmitted powers. If this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, the U-Net uses 50% of the maximum power.

Default Reuse Distance: Enter the radius within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same primary scrambling code.

A reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialog box or in the Cells table). A cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value entered here.

Under Strategy, you can choose an automatic allocation strategy:

Page 111: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-108 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− Clustered − Distributed per Cell − One Cluster per Site − Distributed per Site

Carrier: Choose the carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (the U-Net will assign primary scrambling codes to transmitters using the chosen carrier) or all of them.

No. of codes per cluster: According to 3GPP specifications, the number of codes per cluster is 8. If you wish, you can change the number of codes per cluster.

Use a Maximum of Codes: Choose the Use a Maximum of Codes check box to make the U-Net use the maximum number of codes. For example, if there are two cells using the same domain with two scrambling codes, the U-Net will assign the remaining code to the second cell even if there are no constraints between these two cells (for example, neighbor relations and reuse distance). If you do not choose this option, the U-Net only checks the constraints, and allocates the first ranked code in the list.

Reset All Codes: Choose the Reset All Codes check box if you want the U-Net to delete currently allocated scrambling codes and recalculate all scrambling codes. If you do not choose this option, the U-Net will keep currently allocated scrambling deletes and will only allocate scrambling codes to cells that do not yet have codes allocated.

Allocate Carriers Identically: Choose the Allocate Carriers Identically check box if you want the U-Net to allocate the same primary scrambling code to each carrier of a transmitter. If you do not choose this option, the U-Net allocates scrambling codes independently for each carrier.

Step 5 Click Run.

The U-Net begins the process of allocating scrambling codes.

Once the U-Net has finished allocating scrambling codes, the codes are visible under Results. The U-Net only displays newly allocated scrambling codes.

The Results table contains the following information.

Site: The name of the base station. Cell: The name of the cell. Code: The primary scrambling code allocated to the cell.

If the set constraints make it impossible to allocate scrambling codes to one or more cells, the U-Net will post an error message in the Event Viewer window.

Step 6 Click Commit.

The primary scrambling codes are committed to the cells.

You can save automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration.

If you need to allocate scrambling codes to all the cells on group of transmitters, you can allocate them automatically by choosing Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation from the transmitter group’s shortcut menu.

----End

2.Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually

Page 112: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-109

When you allocate scrambling codes to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let the U-Net allocate scrambling codes automatically. If you want to add a primary scrambling code to one cell or to modify the primary scrambling code of a cell, however, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell.

After allocation, you can use the audit tool to check the reuse scrambling code distances between cells and the compatibility of the domains of the cells for each base station.

To allocate a scrambling code to a UMTS cell manually, perform the following steps:

Step 1 On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a scrambling code. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The transmitter’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Choose the Cells tab.

Step 4 Enter a Primary Scrambling Code in the cell’s column.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify whether the allocated scrambling codes respect the specified constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The scrambling code audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan.

To perform an audit of the allocation plan, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Audit.

The Code and Cluster Audit dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 In the Code and Cluster Audit dialog box, choose the allocation criteria that you want to check:

No. of codes per cluster: Enter the number of scrambling codes per cluster. Neighbors: If you choose the Neighbors check box, the U-Net will check that no cell

has the same scrambling code as any of its neighbors. The report will list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of its neighbors.

Second Order Neighbors: If you choose the Second Order Neighbors check box, the U-Net will check that no cell has the same scrambling code as any of the neighbors of its neighbors. The report will list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of the neighbors of its neighbors.

Neighbors in different clusters: If you choose the Neighbors in different clusters check box, the U-Net will check that neighbor cells have scrambling codes from different clusters. The report will list any neighbor cells that does have scrambling codes from the same cluster.

Page 113: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-110 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Domain Compliance: If you choose the Domain Compliance check box, the U-Net will check if allocated scrambling codes belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with scrambling codes that do not belong to domains assigned to the cell.

Site Domains Not Empty: If you choose the Site Domains Not Empty check box, the U-Net will check for and list base stations for which the allocation domain (that is, the list of possible scrambling codes, with respect to the configured allocation constraints) is empty.

One Cluster per Site: If you choose the One Cluster per Site check box, the U-Net will check for and list base stations whose cells have scrambling codes coming from more than one cluster.

Distance: If you choose the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, the U-Net will check for and list cells that do not respect this code reuse distance.

Exceptional Pairs: If you choose the Exceptional Pairs check box, the U-Net will check for and display pairs of cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but still use the same scrambling code.

Step 5 Click OK.

The U-Net displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt, which it opens at the end of the audit. For each chosen criterion, the U-Net gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details each of them.

----End

Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify several aspects of scrambling code allocation.

1.Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation

In the U-Net, you can search for scrambling codes and scrambling code groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed in the map window in red.

To find scrambling codes or scrambling code groups using the Search Tool, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by transmitter.

Step 2 Click View > Search Tool.

The Search Tool window is displayed. The Search Tool window is a docking window.

Step 3 You can search either for a specific scrambling code or for a scrambling code group:

To search for a scrambling code:

1. Choose Scrambling Code. 2. Enter a scrambling code in the text box.

To search for a scrambling code group:

1. Choose SC Group. 2. Choose a scrambling code group from the list.

Step 4 Choose the carrier you wish to search on from the For the Carrier list, or choose "(All)" to search for the scrambling code or scrambling code group in all carriers.

Page 114: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-111

Step 5 Click Search.

Transmitters with cells matching the search criteria are displayed in red. Transmitters that do not match the search criteria are displayed in grey.

To restore the initial transmitter colors, click the Restore Colors button in the Search Tool window.

----End

2.Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings

You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display scrambling code-related information.

To display scrambling code-related information on the map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Display tab.

You can display the following information per transmitter:

Primary scrambling code: To display the primary scrambling code of a transmitter’s cell, choose "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Primary scrambling code" as the Field.

Ranges of primary scrambling codes: To display ranges of primary scrambling codes, choose "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Cells: Primary scrambling code" as the Field.

Scrambling code domain: To display the scrambling code domain of a transmitter’s cell, choose "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling code domain" as the Field. You can display the following information in the transmitter label or tooltip:

Primary scrambling code: To display the primary scrambling code of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: Primary scrambling code" from the Label or Tip Text list.

Scrambling code domain: To display the primary scrambling code domain of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: Scrambling code domain" from the Label or Tip Text list.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

3.Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code

You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their primary scrambling code or scrambling code domain.

To group transmitters by scrambling code, perform the following steps:

Page 115: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-112 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 On the General tab, click Group by.

The Group dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section.

Step 6 Choose the parameter you want to group transmitters by:

Scrambling code domain Primary scrambling code

Step 7 Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The chosen parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped.

Step 8 If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, choose it in the Group these fields in this order list and click .

The chosen parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped.

Step 9 Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped:

Choose a parameter and click to move it up to the desired position.

Choose a parameter and click to move it down to the desired position.

Step 10 Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialog box.

If a transmitter has more than one cell, the U-Net cannot arrange the transmitter by cell. Transmitters that cannot be grouped by cell are arranged in a separate folder under the Transmitters folder.

----End

4.Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram

You can use a histogram to analyze the use of allocated scrambling codes in a network. The histogram represents the scrambling codes or scrambling code clusters as a function of the frequency of their use.

To display the scrambling code histogram, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Scrambling Code Distribution.

Page 116: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-113

The Distribution Histograms dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Each bar represents a scrambling code or a cluster, its height depending on frequency of its use.

Step 5 Choose Scrambling codes to display scrambling code use and Clusters to display scrambling code cluster use.

Step 6 Move the cursor over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each scrambling code or cluster.

The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.

----End

5.Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction

You can make a scrambling code interference zone coverage prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same scrambling code.

To make a scrambling code interference zone coverage prediction, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Scrambling Zone Interference Zones and click OK.

Step 5 Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the scrambling code interference zone coverage prediction.

The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.

Once the U-Net has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.

----End

9.2 Studying Network Capacity A UMTS network automatically regulates power on both uplink and downlink with the objective of minimising interference and maximising network capacity. In the case of HSDPA, the network uses ADCH power control in the uplink and downlink and a fast link adaptation (in other words, the selection of an HSDPA bearer) in the downlink. The U-Net can simulate these network regulation mechanisms, thereby enabling you to study the capacity of the UMTS network.

In the U-Net, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of R99 and HSDPA users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, the U-Net calculates various network parameters, such as the active set for each mobile, the required power of the mobile, the total DL power and DL throughput per cell, and the UL load per cell. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion.

Page 117: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-114 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

When several simulations are performed at the same time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to another.

To create these snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic.

9.2.1 Defining Multi-Service Traffic Data The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In the U-Net, this is accomplished by creating all the parameters for network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used.

To create simulations, model the following services and users in the U-Net:

R99 radio bearers: Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify the existing ones by using the R99 Radio Bearer table.

Services: Services are the various services, such as voice and mobile internet access, available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched services.

Mobility type: In UMTS, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile station used by a speed driver or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec/I0 requirements and Eb/Nt targets per radio bearer and per link (up and down) are largely dependent on mobile speed.

Terminals: In UMTS, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device.

9.2.2 Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in the U-Net and how to create, import, and use them. The different types of traffic data sources are:

The Operation and Maintenance Centre (OMC) Marketing statistics Population statistics 2G network traffic statistics

The U-Net provides four types of traffic maps for UMTS projects. These maps can be used for the different types of traffic data sources as follows:

Live traffic data from the OMC: Traffic maps per transmitter and per service, where traffic is spread over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the total throughput demand or the number of users.

Marketing-based traffic data: Traffic vector maps based on user profiles, where each vector (polygon or line) carries densities of user profiles and mobility types, and traffic raster maps based on environments, where each pixel has an environment class assigned.

Population-based traffic data: Traffic raster maps based on user densities, where each pixel has an actual user density assigned.

2G network statistics: Cumulated traffic maps.

Page 118: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-115

Live Traffic Data from the OMC The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all the cells in a network. This includes, for example, the number of active users in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. You can use this data to create traffic maps containing the number of active users in each cell or the data transfer characteristics of all the services in each cell.

1.Creating a Traffic Map Based on Live Data

You can input the total throughput demand or the total number of users for each sector in this type of traffic map. A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it.

To create traffic map based on live data, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Traffic folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New Map from the shortcut menu.

The New Traffic Map dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Map based on Transmitters and Services (Throughputs) or Map based on Transmitters and Services (# Users).

Step 5 Click the Create Map button.

The Traffic per Transmitter dialog box is displayed.

You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import a File button. You can import AGD (the U-Net Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from another U-Net document.

Step 6 Choose a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter.

Step 7 Enter the data required in the Traffic per Transmitter dialog box:

If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (Throughputs), enter the throughput demands in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service.

If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (# Users), enter the active users in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service.

You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and choosing Import Table from the menu.

Step 8 Click OK.

The Cell Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 9 Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map.

The total percentages must total 100.

Step 10 Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map.

Page 119: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-116 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The total percentages must total 100.

Step 11 Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter:

A weight to spread the traffic over the vector. The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users

during Monte-Carlo simulations.

Step 12 Click OK.

The U-Net creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.

You can update the information, throughput demands and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map.

----End

To update the traffic map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Traffic folder.

Step 3 Right-click the traffic map based on live data that you want to update.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Update from the shortcut menu.

The Traffic per Transmitter dialog box is displayed.

Choose the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table.

Step 5 Click OK.

The Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK.

The traffic map is updated on the basis of the chosen coverage prediction by transmitter.

----End

Marketing-based Traffic Data The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services.

In the U-Net, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments.

A user profile models the behaviour of different subscriber categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour,

Page 120: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-117

and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or uplink and downlink volume (for packet-switched calls).

Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of subscribers on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (that is, the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²).

1.Modeling User Profiles

You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing.

To create or modify a user profile, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Right-click the User Profiles folder.

The shortcut medu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The User Profiles New Element Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 You can modify the following parameters:

Service: Choose a service from the list. Terminal: Choose a terminal from the list. Calls/Hour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for

the service. The calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For circuit-switched services, one call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each.

For packet-switched services, the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he stops using a service. In packet-switched services, however, he may not use the service continually. For example, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application, or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and not by the time.

In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.

Duration: For circuit-switched services, enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For packet-switched services, this field is left blank.

UL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes.

Page 121: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-118 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

DL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.

----End

2.Modeling Environments

An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (that is, the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.

To create or modify a UMTS environment, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Environments folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The Environments New Element Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Click the General tab.

Step 6 Enter a Name for the new UMTS environment.

Step 7 In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility combination that this UMTS environment will describe:

User: Choose a user profile. Mobility: Choose a mobility type. Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometer

for the combination of user profile and mobility type.

Step 8 Click the Clutter Weighting tab.

Step 9 For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution.

The user distribution is calculated using the following equation:

Nk NAreaWk Sk×

Wi Si×i∑--------------------------×=

Where: Nk = Number of users in the clutter k NAre a = Number of users in the zone Area Wk = Weight of clutter k Sk = Surface area of clutter k (in square km)

Page 122: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-119

For example: An area of 10 km² with a subscriber density is 100/km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 subscribers. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class.

If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor user's path loss.

----End

3.Importing a User Profile Based Traffic Map

User profile based traffic maps are composed of vectors (lines with a number of users/km or polygons with a number of users/km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector.

To create a user profile based traffic map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Traffic folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New Map from the shortcut menu.

The New Traffic Map dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Map based on User Profiles.

Step 5 Click the Import a File button.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

You can also create a traffic map manually in the U-Net by clicking the Create Map button in the New Traffic Map dialog box.

Step 6 Choose the file to import.

Step 7 Click Open.

The File Import dialog box is displayed.

Step 8 Choose Traffic from the Data Type list.

Step 9 Click Import. The U-Net imports the traffic map.

The traffic map’s properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 10 Choose the Traffic tab shown in Figure 9-30.

Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km/h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.

Page 123: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-120 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Figure 9-30 Traffic map properties dialog box - Traffic tab

Define each of the following:

User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, choose "By field" and choose the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the UMTS Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, choose "By value" and choose the user profile in the Choice column.

Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, choose "By field" and choose the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the UMTS Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, choose "By value" and choose the mobility type in the Choice column.

Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, choose "By field" and choose the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, choose "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column in terms of subscribers per square kilometer for the combination of user profile and mobility type.

When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the UMTS Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, the U-Net will display a warning

Step 11 Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution.

The user distribution is calculated using the following equation:

Nk NAreaWk Sk×

Wi Si×i∑--------------------------×=

where: Nk = Number of users in the clutter k NAre a = Number of users in the zone Area Wk = Weight of clutter k Sk = Surface area of clutter k (in square km)

Page 124: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-121

If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.

Step 12 Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.

----End

4.Importing an Environment Class Based Traffic Map

Environment classes describe the distribution of user profiles.

To create a traffic map based on environment classes, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Traffic folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New Map from the shortcut menu.

The New Traffic Map dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Map based on Environments.

Step 5 Click the Import a File button.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

You can also create a traffic map manually in the U-Net by clicking the Create Map button in the New Traffic Map dialog box.

Step 6 Choose the file to import.

Step 7 Click Open.

The File Import dialog box is displayed.

Step 8 Choose Traffic from the Data Type list.

Step 9 Click Import.

The U-Net imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 10 Choose the Description tab.

In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. The U-Net reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column.

Step 11 For each Code, choose the environment it corresponds to from the Name column.

The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under UMTS Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 12 Choose the Display tab.

----End

5.Creating an Environment Class Based Traffic Map

Page 125: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-122 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The U-Net enables you to create an environment class based traffic map manually. If you are creating a map manually, and clicking the Create Map button, the Environment Map Editor toolbar is displayed.

To create a traffic map manually, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Traffic folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New Map from the shortcut menu.

The New Traffic Map dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Map based on environments (raster) as the type of map you want to create.

Step 5 Click Create Map.

The Environment Map Editor toolbar is displayed (shown in Figure 9-31).

Figure 9-31 Environment Map Editor toolbar

Draw Map Delete Map

Step 6 Choose the environment class from the list of available environment classes.

Step 7 Click the Draw Polygon button ( ) to draw the polygon on the map for the chosen environment class.

Step 8 Click the Delete Polygon button ( ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.

Step 9 Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.

----End

6.Displaying Statistics on an Environment Class Based Traffic Map

You can display the statistics of an environment traffic map. The U-Net provides absolute (surface) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone.

To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Traffic folder.

Step 3 Right-click the environment class based traffic map you whose statistics you want to display. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Statistics window is displayed.

Page 126: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-123

The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i

Si

Skk∑-------------- 100×=

You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button.

Step 5 Click Close.

If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.

----End

Population-based Traffic Data Population-based traffic data can be based on population statistics and user densities can be deduced from the density of inhabitants. In the traffic maps based on population statistics, you can enter the number of active, potential, users, per unit surface, that is, the density of users.

1.Importing a Traffic Density Map

The traffic density map defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², the U-Net will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic density map’s properties dialog box.

You can create a number of traffic density maps for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities.

To create a traffic density map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Traffic folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New Map from the shortcut menu.

The New Traffic Map dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Map based on Traffic Densities.

Step 5 Click the Import a File button.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

You can also create a traffic map manually in the U-Net by clicking the Create Map button in the New Traffic Map dialog box.

Step 6 Choose the file to import.

Step 7 Click Open.

The File Import dialog box is displayed.

Step 8 Choose Traffic from the Data Type list.

Page 127: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-124 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 9 Click Import.

The U-Net imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 10 Choose the Traffic tab.

Step 11 Choose whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink.

Step 12 Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map.

The total percentages must total 100.

Step 13 Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map.

The total percentages must total 100.

Step 14 Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map.

The total percentages must total 100.

Step 15 Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users.

An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel.

Step 16 Click OK.

The U-Net creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.

----End

Converting 2G Network Traffic The U-Net provides a feature which can cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you choose and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of active users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, that is, data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic density maps into your UMTS document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of maps.

To import a 2G traffic map into a UMTS document, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Create a live data traffic map in your 2G document for each type of service, that is, one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services.

Step 2 Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1.

Step 3 Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your UMTS document as a traffic density map.

----End

Exporting Cumulated Traffic The U-Net allows you to export the cumulated traffic of all the traffic maps. The cumulated traffic can be exported in 32bit BIL and ArcView© Grid formats.

To export the cumulated traffic, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

Page 128: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-125

Step 2 Right-click the Traffic folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Export Cumulated Traffic from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Enter a file name and choose the file format.

Step 5 Click Save.

The Export dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Specify the area to export, the terminals, mobility types, and service, the traffic maps to consider, and the export resolution.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

9.2.3 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations Once you have modelled the network services and users and have created traffic maps, you can create simulations. The simulation process consists of two steps:

Obtaining a realistic user distribution: The U-Net generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm; this user distribution is based on the traffic database and traffic maps and is weighted by a Poisson distribution between simulations of a same group. Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law that uses the traffic database. The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive users consume radio resources and create interference. Then, the U-Net randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the shadowing effect. Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (possibly according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class).

Modelling network power control: The U-Net uses a power control algorithm for R99 server users, and an algorithm mixing ADPCH power control and fast link adaptation for HSDPA users and an additional loop modelling noise rise scheduling for HSUPA users.

The Power Control Simulation Algorithm The power control algorithm shown in Figure 9-32 simulates the way a UMTS network regulates itself by using uplink and downlink power controls in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. HSDPA users are linked to the A-DPCH radio bearer (a R99 radio bearer). Therefore, the network uses a A-DPCH power control on UL and DL and then it performs fast link adaptation on DL in order to choose a HSDPA radio bearer. For HSUPA users, the network first uses a E-DPCCH/A-DPCH power control on UL and DL, checks that there is a HSDPA connection on downlink and then carries out noise rise scheduling in order to choose an HSUPA radio bearer on uplink. The U-Net simulates these network regulation mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all the mobiles (R99, HSDPA, and HSUPA service users) chosen during the user distribution generation attempt to connect one by one to network transmitters. The process is repeated until the network is balanced, that is, until the convergence criteria (on UL and DL) are satisfied.

Page 129: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-126 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Figure 9-32 Schematic view of simulation algorithm

As shown in Figure 9-32, the simulation algorithm is divided in three parts. All users are evaluated by the R99 part of the algorithm. HSDPA and HSUPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSPDA part of the algorithm. Finally, HSUPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 or HSDPA parts of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSUPA part of the algorithm.

1.Description of the R99 Portion of the Simulation

The R99 part of the algorithm simulates power control, congestion and radio resource control performed for R99 bearers for both R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users. The U-Net considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. The U-Net first calculates the required terminal power in order to reach the Eb/Nt threshold requested by the R99 bearer on UL, followed by the required traffic channel power in order to reach the Eb/Nt threshold requested by the R99 bearer on DL. After calculating power control, the U-Net updates the cell load parameters. The U-Net then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell UL load, the total power transmitted by the cell, the number of channel elements and OVSF codes consumed by the cell.

At this point, R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if:

The signal quality is not sufficient: − On the downlink, the pilot quality is not high enough (no cell in the user active set):

status is "Ec/I0 pilot < Ec/I0 min. pilot" − On the downlink, there is not enough reception on traffic channel: the status is "Ptch

> Ptch max"

Page 130: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-127

− On the uplink, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Pmob max"

Even if constraints above are respected, the network may be saturated: − The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion): the status

is either "Admission rejection" or "UL load saturation" − There are not enough channel elements on site: the status is "channel element

saturation" − There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation" − There are no more OVSF codes available: the status is "code saturation"

2.Description of the HSDPA Portion of the Simulation

In the HSDPA part, the U-Net processes all HSDPA bearer users, that is, HSDPA and HSUPA users. The HSDPA part of the algorithm simulates fast link adaptation, the scheduling of HSDPA users, and radio resource control on downlink. Two fast link adaptations are done, one before mobile scheduling and one after.

HSDPA bearer selection is based on lookup tables, available by double-clicking the corresponding entry in the Reception Equipment table, under the Terminals shortcut menu and it depends on reported CQI, UE and cell capabilities as detailed below.

Figure 9-33 HSDPA bearer selection

The HSDPA and HSSCCH powers of a cell are evaluated before calculating HSPDSCH Ec/Nt. The HSDPA power (the power dedicated to HSSCCH and HSPDSCH of HSDPA bearer users) of a cell can be either fixed (statically allocated) or dynamically allocated. If it is dynamically allocated, the power allocated to HSDPA depends on how much power is required to serve R99 traffic. In other words, the power available after all common channels (including the power for downlink HSUPA channels) and all R99 traffic have been served is allocated to HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA bearer users. Similarly, the power per HSSCCH can be either fixed or dynamically allocated in order to attain the HSSCCH Ec/Nt threshold. Using the HSSCCH and HSPDA powers, the U-Net evaluates the HS-PDSCH power (the difference between the HSDPA power and the HS-SCCH power), calculates the HSPDSCH Ec/Nt and, from that, the corresponding CQI (from the graph CQI=f(HSPDSCH Ec/Nt) defined for the terminal reception equipment and the user mobility). Then, the U-Net chooses the HSDPA bearer associated to this CQI (in the table Best Bearer=f(HSPDSCH CQI) defined for the terminal reception equipment and the user mobility) and compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities.

Before mobile scheduling, each user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell. This means that the U-Net determines the HSDPA bearer for each HSDPA and HSUPA user by considering for each the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.

During scheduling, cell radio resources are shared between HSDPA and HSUPA users by the scheduler. The scheduler simultaneously manages the maximum number of users within each cell and ranks them according to the chosen scheduling technique:

THE EXPLANATIONS MAY CHANGE A BIT IN 2.6.0.

Max C/I: users are sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI).

Page 131: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-128 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Round Robin: users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (that is, in random order).

Proportional Fair: users are first sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI). Then, the first "n" users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation.

After mobile scheduling, the U-Net carries out a second fast link adaptation. HSDPA and HSUPA users are processed in the order defined by the scheduler and the cell’s HSDPA power is shared among them.

Then, the U-Net checks to see if enough codes are available for the HSDPA bearer assigned to the user (taking into account the maximum number of OVSF codes defined for the cell). If not, the U-Net allocates a lower HSDPA bearer ("downgrading") which needs fewer OVSF codes. If no OVSF codes are available, the user is delayed.

At this point, HSDPA bearer users can be connected, rejected, or delayed. They are rejected if the maximum number of HSDPA users per cell is exceeded (status is "HSDPA scheduler saturation") and delayed if:

They cannot obtain the lower HSDPA bearer (bearer index 5): the status is "HSDPA Delayed"

The HS-SCCH signal quality is not sufficient: the status is "HSDPA Delayed" There are no more HS-SCCH channels available: the status is "HSDPA Delayed" There are no more OVSF codes available: the status is "HSDPA Delayed"

3.Description of the HSUPA Portion of the Simulation

In the HSUPA part, the U-Net processes all the HSUPA users who are connected to a HSDPA bearer or were delayed in the previous step. It considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution without exceeding the maximum number of HSUPA users within each cell. The HSUPA part of the algorithm simulates an admission control on these HSUPA users followed by noise rise scheduling. The happy bit mechanism is modelled as well and radio resource control is performed at the end of the HSUPA part of the simulation.

The U-Net first chooses a list of HSUPA bearers that are compatible with the user equipment capabilities for each HSUPA user. Then, during admission control, it checks that the lowest compatible bearer in terms of the required EDPDCH Ec /Nt does not require a terminal power higher than the maximum terminal power allowed.

Then, the U-Net begins noise rise scheduling. The noise rise scheduling algorithm attempts to evenly share the remaining cell load between the users admitted in admission control; in terms of HSUPA, each user is allocated a right to produce interference. The remaining cell load factor on uplink depends on the maximum load factor allowed on uplink and how much uplink load is produced by the served R99 traffic. From this value, the U-Net calculates the maximum EDPDCH Ec/Nt allowed and can choose an HSUPA bearer. The HSUPA bearer is chosen based on the values in a lookup table, and depends on the maximum EDPDCH Ec/Nt allowed and on UE capabilities.

You can open the HSUPA Bearer Selection table by right-clicking Terminals on the Data tab of the Explorer window and choosing Reception Equipment. Then, double-clicking the entry in the Reception Equipment table opens the Properties dialog box from which you can choose the HSUPA Bearer Selection tab.

The U-Net chooses the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers, in other words, the HSUPA bearer with the highest potential throughput where the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt is lower than the maximum EDPDCH Ec/Nt allowed and the required terminal power is

Page 132: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-129

lower than the maximum terminal power. In this section, the potential throughput refers to the ratio between the RLC peak rate and the number of retransmissions. When several HSUPA bearers are available, the U-Net chooses the one with the lowest required EDPDCH Ec/Nt.

Then, the U-Net checks that each user has obtained the average requested rate (defined in the properties of the service). A user is considered as "happy" if the RLC peak rate provided by the HSUPA bearer exceeds the average requested rate and "unhappy" if not. The U-Net collects the unused load of "happy" users and redistributes it among the "unhappy" users. This process is repeated until there is no more available load.

Finally, the U-Net carries out radio resource control, verifying the uplink load of all the cells and performs a new distribution of the load if cells are overloaded.

At this point, HSUPA users can be either connected, or rejected. They are rejected if:

The maximum number of HSUPA users per cell is exceeded (the status is "HSUPA scheduler saturation")

The terminal power required to obtain the lowest compatible HSUPA bearer exceeds the maximum terminal power in the admission control (the status is "HSUPA Admission Rejection").

4.Bearer Downgrading

If you choose the option "Rate Downgrading," when creating a simulation, R99, HSDPA and HSUPA service users can be downgraded under certain circumstances. When the downgrading is allowed, the U-Net does not reject R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users directly; it downgrades them beforehand.

The R99 to R99 bearer downgrading occurs when:

The cell resources are insufficient when the user is admitted The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded

The cell resources are insufficient during congestion control − The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded − There is not enough power for cells − There are not enough channel elements on the site − There are no more OVSF codes available

The user maximum connection power is exceeded during power control: − On the downlink, the maximum traffic channel power is exceeded − On the uplink, the maximum terminal power is exceeded

For all these reasons, the user’s R99 bearer will be downgraded to another R99 bearer of the same type (same traffic class). Upon admission and during power control, downgrading is only performed on the user who causes the problem. During congestion control, the problem is at the cell level and therefore, downgrading is performed on several users according to their service priority. Users with the lowest priority services will be the first to be downgraded.

If R99 bearer downgrading does not fix the problem, the user will be rejected.

For a HSDPA bearer user, downgrading is triggered upon admission (into the R99 portion) when the best serving cell does not support HSDPA traffic. When this happens, the HSDPA bearer user will not be able to get a HSDPA bearer and will be downgraded to a R99 bearer of the same type as the A-DPCH bearer and the user will be processed as a R99 user.

For an HSUPA bearer user, downgrading is triggered upon admission (into the R99 portion) when the best serving cell does not support HSUPA traffic. When this happens, the HSUPA

Page 133: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-130 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

bearer user will not be able to get an HSUPA bearer and will be downgraded to a R99 bearer of the same type as the EDPCCH/ADPCH bearer and the user will be processed as a R99 user.

Creating Simulations In the U-Net, simulations enable you to model UMTS HSPA network regulation mechanisms in order to minimise interference and maximise capacity.

You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence.

To create a simulation or a group of simulations, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The properties dialog box for a new simulation or group of simulations is displayed.

Step 4 On the General tab of the dialog box, enter a Name and Comments for this simulation or group of simulations.

Step 5 Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters:

Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Execute Later: If you choose the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not chosen, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialog box.

Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate UMTS coverage studies after simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predictions and then clicking the Calculate button ( ).

Information to retain: You can choose the level of detail that will be available in the output: − Only the average simulation and statistics: None of the individual simulations are

displayed or available in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available.

Some calculation and display options available for prediction studies are not available when the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is chosen.

− No information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs — Statistics, Sites, Cells, and Initial conditions — is available.

− Standard information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles.

− Detailed information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains additional mobile-related output on the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs.

Page 134: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-131

When you are working on very large radio-planning projects, you can reduce memory comsumption by choosing Only the average simulation and statistics under Information to retain.

Step 6 Under Cell Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that the U-Net must respect during the simulation:

Number of Channel Elements: Choose the Number of Channel Elements check box if you want the U-Net to respect the number of channel elements defined for each site.

Number of Codes: Choose the Number of Codes check box if you want the U-Net to respect the number of OVSF codes available each cell.

UL Load Factor: If you want the UL load factor to be considered in the simulation, choose the UL Load Factor check box.

Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink cell load factor, click the button ( ) beside the box and choose Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink cell load factor. If you want to use the maximum uplink cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and choose Defined per Cell.

DL Load (% Max Power): If you want the DL load to be considered in the simulation, choose the DL Load (% Max Power) check box and enter a maximum downlink cell load in the Max DL Load box.

Max DL Load (% Max Power): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink cell load , as a percentage of the maximum power, click the button ( ) beside the box and choose Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum downlink cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the maximum downlink cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and choose Defined per Cell.

Step 7 Under Bearer Negotiation on the General tab, check the Rate Downgrading check box if you want to permit bearer downgrading during the simulation.

When a constraint is not respected, user bearers are downgraded. If the constraint is still not satisfied after downgrading, users are rejected. If downgrading is not chosen, users will be rejected immediately, starting with users with the lowest service priority, if a constraint can not be respected.

You can prevent downgrading for certain services by setting the service priority to 100. In this case, users with the service will not be downgraded; if a constraint is not respected, they will be rejected immediately.

Step 8 On the Source Traffic tab, enter the values for the following parameters:

Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic

parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).

Choose Traffic Maps to Be Used: Choose the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation.

Choose only traffic maps of the same type. If you have several different types of maps and want to make simulations on each type, you must create a different simulation for each type of traffic map.

Step 9 Click the Advanced tab.

Page 135: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-132 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 10 Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value.

If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.

Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one parameter changes.

Step 11 Under Convergence, enter the following parameters:

Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that the U-Net should run to make convergence.

UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interfence and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations.

DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interfence and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.

Step 12 Click OK.

The U-Net immediately begins the simulation unless you chosen the Execute Later check box on the General tab.

All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now use the completed simulations for specific UMTS and HSDPA coverage predictions.

----End

Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map The U-Net enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, pilot signal strength, or soft handover gain.

You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and the choose the value to be displayed. Or, you can choose the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then choose the parameter and the value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colors of the icon and the icon itself.

In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution:

1.Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handover Status 2.Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status 3.Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service

You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geo data and predictions.

1.Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handover Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the handover status.

To display the traffic distribution by the handover status, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder.

Page 136: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-133

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The UMTS Simulations Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 On the Display tab of the dialog box, choose "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "HO Status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set)" as the Field.

Step 5 Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by handover status shown in Figure 9-34.

Figure 9-34 Displaying the traffic distribution by handover status

----End

2.Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status.

To display the traffic distribution by the connection status, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The UMTS Simulations Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 On the Display tab of the dialog box, choose "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Connection status" as the Field.

Page 137: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-134 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 5 Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by connection status shown in Figure 9-35.

Figure 9-35 Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status

----End

3.Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service.

To display the traffic distribution by service, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The UMTS Simulations Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 On the Display tab of the dialog box, choose "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field.

Step 5 Click OK.

Page 138: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-135

The traffic distribution is now displayed by service shown in Figure 9-36.

Figure 9-36 Displaying the traffic distribution by service

----End

Displaying the User Active Set on the Map The U-Net enables you to display on the map the active set for each user generated by a simulation.

To display the active set for a user:

On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best and second-best servers you want to display. The servers in the user’s active set are connected to the user with lines the same color as the serving transmitter. The best server is indicated with the number "1", the second-best with number "2" and so on. Figure 9-37 shows a user with three servers in his active set.

Figure 9-37 The active set of a user

Page 139: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-136 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation After you have created a simulation, you can display the results.

To access the results of a single simulation, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results you want to access.

Step 4 Right-click the simulation.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 5 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

A simulation properties dialog box is displayed.

One tab gives statistics of the results of the simulation. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialog box contain simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simultation. The amount of detail available when you display the results depends on the level of detail you chosen from the Information to retain list on the General tab of the properties dialog box for the group of simulations.

----End

The Statistics tab contains the following two sections:

Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: − The U-Net calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the

result of the first random trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and cartography.

− During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided.

− The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL rates) is given.

Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection requests: − The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. − The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason

for rejection. These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design.

− The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the UL and DL total rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA and HSUPA users (since all of them request a R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the algorithm. These data are also given per service.

− The total number and the percentage of connected users with a HSDPA bearer, the number of users per activity status, and DL total rate that they generate. Both HSDPA and HSUPA users are considered since they both request a HSDPA bearer.

Page 140: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-137

− The total number of connected HSUPA users and the percentage of users with an HSUPA bearer, the number of users per activity status, and UL and DL total rates they generate. Only HSUPA users are considered.

The Sites tab contains the following information per site: − Max No. of CEs (DL and UL): The maximum number of channel elements available

on uplink and downlink for R99 bearers requested by R99 and HSDPA users. − No. of CEs Used (DL and UL): The number of channel elements required on uplink

and downlink for R99 bearers to handle the traffic of current simulation. − No. CEs Due to SHO Overhead DL and UL: The number of extra channel elements

due to soft handover, on uplink and downlink. − Carrier Selection: The carrier selection method defined on the site equipment. − Overhead CEs/Cell Downlink and Uplink: The overhead channel elements per cell

on the downlink and on the uplink, defined on the site equipment. − AS Restricted to Neighbors: Whether the active set is restricted to neighbors of the

reference cell. This option is chosen on the site equipment. − Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables the U-Net to

model a rake receiver on download. − MUD Factor: The multi-user detection factor, defined on the site equipment, is used

to decrease intra-cellular interference on uplink. − Compressed Mode: Whether compressed mode is supported. This option is defined

on the site equipment. − Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps). − HSUPA Rate (kbps): The HSUPA peak rate in kbps. − DL and UL Throughput for Each Service: The R99 throughput in kbits /s for each

service. The result is detailed on the downlink and uplink only when relevant. The Cells tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and carrier: − Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties. − Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power as defined in the cell properties. − SCH power (dBm): The SCH power as defined in the cell properties. − Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels. It includes the

other CCH power and the DL HSUPA power as defined in the cell properties. − Available HSDPA Power (dBm): The available HSDPA power as defined in the cell

properties. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. The value is either fixed by the user when the HSDPA power is allocated statically, or by a simulation when the option HSDPA Power Dymanic Allocation is chosen.

− AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold as defined in cell properties − Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. − Reception loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. − Transmission loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter

properties. − BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter

properties − Total Transmitted R99 Power (dBm): The total transmitted R99 power is the power

transmitted by the cell on common channels (Pilot, SCH, other CCH), HSUPA channels (EAGCH, ERGCH, and EHICH) and R99 traffic-dedicated channels.

Page 141: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-138 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− Total Transmitted Power (dBm): The total transmitted power of the cell is the sum of the total transmitted R99 power and the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, this total transmitted power must be lower than or equal to the maximum power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the total transmitted power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom. In other words, the HSDPA power corresponds to the difference between the total transmitted power and the R99 transmitted power.

When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is statically allocated, the total transmitted power cannot exceed the maximum DL load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). On the other hand, if HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the control is carried out on the R99 transmitted power, which cannot exceed the maximum DL load.

− UL Total Noise (dBm): The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cellular terminals (uplink total interference) and the thermal noise.

− Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor that the cell can support. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialog box.

− Max DL Load (% Used Power): The maximum percentage of power that the cell can use. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialog box.

− UL load factor (%): The uplink cell load factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. If the constraint "UL load factor" has been chosen, UL cell load factor is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum UL load factor (either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialog box).

− UL load factor due HSUPA (%): The uplink cell load factor due to HSUPA traffic. − DL Load Factor (%): The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (DL

average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) / (DL average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area).

− UL and DL noise rise (dB): The uplink and downlink noise rises are calculated from uplink and downlink load factors. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).

− DL R99 Load (% Power Used): The percentage of power used for R99 channels is determined by the total transmitted R99 power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the DL R99 Load can not exceed the user-defined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation).

− Reuse factor (UL): The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cellular interference (signals received by the transmitter from intra and extra-cellular terminals). This is the ratio between the uplink total interference and the intra-cellular interference.

− Reuse efficiency factor (UL): The uplink reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the uplink reuse factor.

− Number of UL and DL radio links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink and indicates the number of users connected to the cell on uplink and downlink. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links.

− Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total number of users in the cell.

Page 142: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-139

− HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): This is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead and addressing).

− Min HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the lowest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA users connected to the cell.

− Max HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the highest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA users connected to the cell.

− Avg instantaneous HSDPA Throughput (kbps): The average instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the average number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide one connected HSDPA user with a HSDPA bearer.

− Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected HSDPA users with a HSDPA bearer.

− No. of Simultaneous HSDPA Users: The number of simultaneous HSDPA corresponds to the number of HSDPA users that the cell supports at a time, that is within one time transmission interval. All these users are connected to the cell at the end of the simulation HSDPA part (they have a connection with the A-DCH R99 bearer and a HSDPA bearer).

The number of HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell at any given moment (within a time transmission interval).

− No. of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA users including the connected and delayed HSDPA users.

− No. of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users connected to the cell. − No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per cell. − The types of handover as a percentage: The U-Net estimates the percentages of

handover types for each transmitter. The U-Net only lists the results for the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-soft (2/3) and soft-soft (3/3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are grouped.

− UL and DL throughput (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent respectively the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell on uplink and on downlink to supply HSDPA and R99 users with a R99 bearer.

The Mobiles tab contains the following information:

The Mobiles tab only is displayed if, when creating the simulation, you choose either "Standard information about mobiles" or "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.

− X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial).

− Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.

− Terminal: The assigned terminal. The U-Net uses the the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile.

− User: The assigned user profile. The U-Net uses the the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile.

− Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.

− Activity: The activity status assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.

Page 143: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-140 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− Carrier: The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection. − DL and UL Requested Rate (kbps): For a R99 user, the DL and UL Requested Rate

correspond to the DL and UL nominal rates of the R99 bearer associated to the service. For an HSDPA user, the uplink requested rate corresponds to the nominal rate of A-DPCH R99 bearer and the downlink requested rate is the sum of the A-DCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate that the chosen HSDPA radio bearer can provide. Here, the HSDPA user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, the U-Net determines the HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell. For an HSUPA user, the uplink requested rate corresponds to the RLC peak rate of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. The requested HSUPA radio bearer is chosen from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the user equipment; it is the lowest HSUPA bearer that provides the lowest potential throughput that is higher than the average requested rate. In this section, the potential throughput refers to the ratio between the RLC peak rate and the number of retransmissions. The downlink requested rate is the sum of the EDPCCH/ADPCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate that the requested HSDPA radio bearer can provide. The requested HSDPA bearer is determined as described in the previous paragraph.

− DL and UL Obtained Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the obtained rate is the same as the requested rate if he is connected without being downgraded. Otherwise, the obtained rate is lower (it corresponds to the nominal rate of the chosen R99 bearer). If the user was rejected, the obtained rate is zero. For an HSDPA user connected to a HSDPA bearer, the uplink obtained rate equals the requested one and the downlink obtained rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the A-DPCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the chosen HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the HSDPA user is delayed (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer), uplink and downlink obtained rates correspond to the uplink and downlink nominal rates of A-DPCH radio bearer. Finally, if the HSDPA user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (that is, because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the uplink and downlink obtained rates are zero. For a connected HSUPA user, on uplink, if the user is connected to an HSUPA bearer, the obtained uplink rate is the sum of the E-DPCCH/A-DPCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the chosen HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. On downlink, if the user is connected to an HSDPA bearer, the obtained downlink rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate. The instantaneous rate is the sum of the E-DPCCH/A-DPCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the chosen HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed, the obtained downlink rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of E-DPCCH/A-DPCH radio bearer. If the HSUPA user is rejected, the obtained uplink and downlink rates are "0."

− Mobile Total Power (dBm): The mobile total power corresponds to the total power transmitted by the terminal.

− Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected, delayed or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. If delayed (for HSDPA users only), the status is "HSDPA delayed."

− Best-server: The best server among the transmitters in the mobile active set. − HO status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set): The HO status is the number of sites

compared to the number of transmitters in the active set.

Page 144: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-141

− AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so on is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.

− Ec/I0 AS 1, 2, 3, 4, (dB): Ec/I0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.

− Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not. − Active compressed mode: This field indicates whether active compressed mode is

supported by the mobile or not. The following columns only appear if, when creating the simulation, you choose "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain:

− HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSDPA application throughput is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead and addressing). It is calculated from the instantaneous HSDPA rate (that is, the DL obtained rate), the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset.

− Served HSDPA Power: This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA user with the downlink obtained rate.

− Required HSDPA Power: The required HSDPA power is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA user with the downlink requested rate. If the HSDPA bearer allocated to the user is the best one, the required HSDPA power corresponds to the available HSDPA power of the cell. On the other hand, if the HSDPA has been downgraded in order to be compliant with cell and UE capabilities, the required HSDPA power will be lower than the available HSDPA power of the cell.

− No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Required): The number of retransmissions performed by the requested HSUPA radio bearer.

− No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Obtained): The number of retransmissions performed by the obtained HSUPA radio bearer.

− HSUPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSUPA application throughput is the net HSUPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead and addressing. It is calculated from the UL obtained rate, the BLER, the HSUPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset.

− Cell Power TCH AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the downlink is given for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set.

− Ntot DL AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (dBm): The total noise on the downlink for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the \active set.

− Load Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (%): The load factor on the downlink for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. It corresponds to the ratioi between the total interference on the downlink and total noise at the terminal.

− Noise rise AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dB): The noise rise on the downlink for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set.

− Reuse Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL): The DL reuse factor for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. It is calculated from the interference received at the terminal from the intra transmitter area and the total interference received at the terminal from all the transmitters (intra and extra-cellular).

− Iintra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The intra-cellular interference for each cell (I) of the active set.

− Iextra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The extra-cellular interference for each

cell (I) of the active set.

Page 145: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-142 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− Total Att. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (dB): The total attentuation for each link between the

mobile and a transmitter in the active set. − No. Uplink CEs: The number of channel elements consumed on the uplink by the

mobile. − No. Downlink CEs: The number of channel elements consumed on the downlink by

the mobile. − Name: The name of the mobile, as assigned during the random user generation. − Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. − Orthogonality Factor: The orthogonality factor used in the simulation. The

orthogonality factor is the remaining orthogonality of the OVSF codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the clutter classes, or on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialog box.

− % Pilot Finger: The percentage pilot finger used in the simulation, defined per clutter class or globally for all clutter classes.

− UL SHO Gain (dB): The uplink soft handover gain is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on UL and DL.

− DL SHO Gain (dB): The downlink soft handover gain is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on UL and DL.

− No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per cell. The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab contains information on the shadowing margin for each link between the receiver and up to ten closest potential transmitters:

The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab only is displayed if, when creating the simulation, you choose "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.

− Name: The name assigned to the mobile. − Value at Receiver (dB): The value of the shadowing margin at the receiver. − Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. − Path To: The name of the potential transmitter. − Value (dB): The shadowing value for the potential link in the corresponding Path To

column. These values depend on the model standard deviation per clutter type on which the receiver is located and are randomly distributed on a gaussian curve.

The Packet Session Parameters tab contains the following information:

The Packet Session Parameters tab only is displayed if, when creating the simulation, you choose "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.

− Name: The name assigned to the mobile making the packet session. − NPC (DL): The number of packet calls on the downlink. − SPC (DL): The size of the packet calls on the downlink. − NP (DL): The number of packets on the downlink per packet call. − DP (DL): The time on the downlink between packet calls. − NPC (UL): The number of packet calls on the uplink. − SPC (UL): The size of the packet calls on the uplink. − NP (UL): The number of packets on the uplink per packet call.

Page 146: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-143

− DP (UL): The time on the uplink between packet calls.

The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information:

The global transmitter parameters: − The spreading width − The default orthogonality factor − The default uplink soft handover gain − Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not − The methods used to calculate I0 and Nt − Parameters parameters to compressed mode.

The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: − The maximum number of iterations − The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds − The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of

channel elements, the uplink load factor and the maximum load − The name of the traffic maps used.

Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations After you have created a group of simulations, you can display the average results of the group. If you wish to display the results of a single simulation of a group, refer to "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation."

To access the averaged results of a group of simulations, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access.

Step 4 Choose Average Simulation from the shortcut menu.

A properties dialog box is displayed.

One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialog box contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation.

The Statistics tab contains the following two sections:

Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: − The U-Net calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the

result of the first random trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and cartography.

− During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. The UL and DL rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided.

− The breakdown per service (number of users, UL and DL rates) is given. Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection requests:

− The number of iterations that were run in order to converge.

Page 147: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-144 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design.

− The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, and the UL and DL total rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the algorithm. These data are also given per service.

− The total number and the percentage of connected HSDPA users with an HSDPA bearer, UL and DL total rates that they generate. Only HSDPA users are considered.

The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site: − Max No. of CEs (DL and UL): The maximum number of channel elements available

on uplink and downlink for R99 bearers requested by R99 and HSDPA users. − No. of CEs Used (DL and UL): The number of channel elements required on uplink

and downlink for R99 bearers to handle the traffic of current simulation. − No. CEs Due to SHO Overhead DL and UL: The number of extra channel elements

due to soft handover, on uplink and downlink. − Carrier Selection: The carrier selection method defined on the site equipment. − Overhead CEs/Cell Downlink and Uplink: The overhead channel elements per cell

on the downlink and on the uplink, defined on the site equipment. − AS Restricted to Neighbors: Whether the active set is restricted to neighbors of the

reference cell. This option is chosen on the site equipment. − Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables the U-Net to

model a rake receiver on download. − MUD Factor: The multi-user detection factor, defined on the site equipment, is used

to decrease intra-cellular interference on uplink. − Compressed Mode: Whether compressed mode is supported. This option is defined

on the site equipment. − Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps). − DL and UL Throughput for Each Service: The R99 throughput in kbits /s for each

service. The Cells (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and carrier: − Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties. − Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power as defined in the cell properties. − SCH power (dBm): The SCH power as defined in the cell properties. − Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels. It includes the

other CCH power and the DL HSUPA power as defined in the cell properties. − Available HSDPA Power (dBm): The available HSDPA power as defined in the cell

properties. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. The value is either fixed by the user when the HSDPA power is allocated statically or by a simulation when the option HSDPA Power Dymanic Allocation is chosen.

− AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold as defined in cell properties − Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. − Reception loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties.

Page 148: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-145

− Transmission loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties.

− BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties

− Total Transmitted R99 Power (dBm): The total transmitted R99 power is the power transmitted by the cell on common channels (Pilot, SCH, other CCH), HSUPA channels (EAGCH, ERGCH, and EHICH) and R99 traffic-dedicated channels.

− Total Transmitted Power (dBm): The total transmitted power of the cell is the sum of the total transmitted R99 power and the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, this total transmitted power must be lower than or equal to the maximum power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the total transmitted power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom. In other words, the HSDPA power corresponds to the difference between the total transmitted power and the R99 transmitted power.

When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is statically allocated, the total transmitted power cannot exceed the maximum DL load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). On the other hand, if HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the control is carried out on the R99 transmitted power, which cannot exceed the maximum DL load.

− UL Total Noise (dBm): The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cellular terminals (uplink total interference) and the thermal noise.

− Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor that the cell can support. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialog box.

− Max DL Load (% Used Power): The maximum percentage of power that the cell can use. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialog box.

− UL load factor (%): The uplink cell load factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. If the constraint "UL load factor" has been chosen, UL cell load factor is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum UL load factor (either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialog box).

− UL load factor due HSUPA (%): The uplink cell load factor due to HSUPA traffic. − DL Load Factor (%): The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (DL

average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) / (DL average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area).

− UL and DL noise rise (dB): The uplink and downlink noise rises are calculated from uplink and downlink load factors. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).

− DL R99 Load (% Power Used): The percentage of power used for R99 channels is determined by the total transmitted R99 power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the DL R99 Load can not exceed the user-defined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation).

− Reuse factor (UL): The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cellular interference (signals received by the transmitter from intra and extra-cellular terminals). This is the ratio between the uplink total interference and the intra-cellular interference.

Page 149: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-146 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− Reuse efficiency factor (UL): The uplink reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the uplink reuse factor.

− Number of UL and DL radio links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink and indicates the number of users connected to the cell on uplink and downlink. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links.

− Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total number of users in the cell.

− HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps) − Min HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate

corresponds to the lowest of RLC peak rates requested by HSDPA users connected to the cell.

− Max HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate: It corresponds to the highest of RLC peak rates requested by HSDPA users connected to the cell.

− Avg instantaneous HSDPA Throughput (kbps): The average instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the average number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide one connected HSDPA user with a HSDPA bearer.

− Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected HSDPA users with a HSDPA bearer.

− No. of Simultaneous HSDPA Users: The number of simultaneous HSDPA corresponds to the number of HSDPA users that the cell supports at a time, that is within one time transmission interval. All these users are connected to the cell at the end of the simulation HSDPA part (they have a connection with the A-DCH R99 bearer and a HSDPA bearer). At any given moment in time (within a time transmission interval), the number of simultaneous HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell.

− No. of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA users includes the connected and delayed HSDPA users.

− No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per cell. − The types of handover as a percentage: The U-Net estimates the percentages of

handover types for each transmitter. The U-Net only lists the results for the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-soft (2/3) and soft-soft (3/3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are grouped.

− UL and DL throughput (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent respectively the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell on uplink and on downlink to supply HSDPA and R99 users with a R99 bearer.

----End

Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, you can update values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. The following values are updated:

Total Transmitted Power UL Load Factor UL Reuse Factor Available HSDPA Power

Page 150: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-147

Number of HSDPA Users UL Load Factor due to HSUPA Number of HSUPA Users.

To update cell values with simulation results, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Display the simulation results:

To display the results for a group of simulations:

1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder. 3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. 4. Choose Average Simulation from the shortcut menu.

A properties dialog box is displayed. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialog box contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation.

To display the results for a single simulation:

1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the

simulation whose results you want to access. 4. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

A simulation properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Cells tab.

Step 3 On the Cells tab, click Commit Loads.

The following values are updated for each cell:

Total Transmitted Power UL Load Factor UL Reuse Factor Available HSDPA Power Number of HSDPA Users UL Load Factor due to HSUPA Number of HSUPA Users.

Some guidelines to improve the results depending on the rejection causes

----End

Adding New Simulations to a U-Net Document When you have created a simulation or group of simulations, you can re-examine the same conditions by adding new simulations to the U-Net document. In the U-Net, there are the following ways of adding new simulations:

Page 151: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-148 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Adding to a group: When you add one or more simulations to an existing group of simulations, the U-Net reuses the same input (radio, traffic, and simulation parameters) as those used to generate the group of simulations. It then generates a new user distribution and performs the power control simulation. To add a simulation to a group of simulations, refer to "1.Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations."

Replaying a group: When you replay an existing group of simulations, the U-Net reuses the same user distribution (users with a service, mobility and an activity status) and traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed and Eb/Nt thresholds) as the ones used to calculate the initial simulation. On the other hand, the shadowing error distribution between simulations is different and only radio data modifications (new transmitters and changes to the antenna azimuth) are taken into account during the power control (or rate/power control) simulation. To replay a group of simulations, refer to "----End 2.Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations."

Using the Generator Initialisation Number: When you create groups of simulations using the same generator initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0) the U-Net generates the same user and shadowing error distributions (user with a service, mobility, an activity status and a shadowing error) in all groups using the same number. However, any modifications to traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed and Eb/Nt thresholds) and radio data (new transmitter and azimuth) are taken into account during the power control simulation. By creating and calculating one group of simulations, making a change to the network and then creating and calculating a new group of simulations using the same generator initialisation number, you can see the difference your parameter changes make. To create a new simulation to a group of simulations using the generator initialisation number, refer to "1.Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations." Duplicating a Group: When you duplicate a group, the U-Net creates a group of simulations with the same simulation parameters as those used to generate the group of simulations. You can then modify the simulation parameters before calculating the group. To duplicate a group of simulations, refer to "----End 4.Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations."

1.Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations

To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.

Step 3 Right-click the group of simulations to which you want to add a simulation.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The properties dialog box of the group of simulations is displayed.

When adding a simulation to an existing group of simulations, the parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations is used for the new simulations. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the added simulation.

Step 5 On the General tab of the dialog box, if desired, change the Name and Comments for this group of simulations.

Page 152: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-149

Step 6 Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters:

Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be added to this group of simulations.

Execute Later: If you choose the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not chosen, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialog box.

Step 7 Click OK.

The U-Net immediately begins the simulation unless you chosen the Execute Later check box on the General tab.

----End

2.Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations

To replay an existing simulation or group of simulations, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.

Step 3 Right-click the group of simulations you want to replay.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Replay from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Under Convergence, you can set the following parameters:

Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that the U-Net should run to make convergence.

UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interfence and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations.

DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interfence and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.

Step 6 Under Bearer Negotiation on the General tab, check the Rate Downgrading check box if you want to permit bearer downgrading during the simulation.

Step 7 Under Cell Load Constraints, you can set the constraints that the U-Net must respect during the simulation.

Step 8 Choose the level of detail that will be available in the output from the Information to retain list.

Step 9 Click OK.

The U-Net immediately begins the simulation unless you chosen the Execute Later check box on the General tab.

----End

3.Creating a New Simulation or Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number

Page 153: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-150 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

To create a new simulation or group of simulations using the generator initialisation number, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

The properties dialog box for a new simulation or group of simulations is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Advanced tab.

Step 5 Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value.

The integer must be the same generator initialisation number as used in the group of simulations with the user and shadowing error distributions you want to use in this simulation or group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.

You can create a new group of simulations with the same parameters as the original group of simulations by duplicating an existing one.

----End

4.Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations

To duplicate an existing simulation or group of simulations, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.

Step 3 Right-click the simulation or group of simulations you want to duplicate.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 The properties dialog box for the duplicated group of simulations is displayed.

You can change the parameters for the duplicated simulation or group of simulations.

----End

Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against an increase traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).

To change the global scaling factor, perform the following steps:

Page 154: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-151

Step 1 Create a simulation or group of simulations by:

Creating a new simulation or group of simulations. Duplicating an existing simulation or group of simulations.

Step 2 Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialog box.

Step 3 Enter a Global Scaling Factor.

For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).

----End

9.2.4 Analyzing the Results of a Simulation In the U-Net, you have several methods available to help you analyze simulation results. You can make an active set analysis of a real-time probe user or you can make a coverage study where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a defined terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses are based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations.

You can find information on the analysis methods in the following sections:

Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results

Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you information on the pilot quality (Ec/I0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells. In this case, these parameters can be either outputs of a given simulation, or average values calculated from a group of simulations. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, mobility and a service.

Before you make an AS analysis:

Ensure the simulation or group of simulations you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map.

Replay the simulation or group of simulations you want to use if you have modified radio parameters since you made the simulation.

The AS analysis does not take possible network saturation into account. Therefore, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile with the same receiver characteristics can verify the point analysis, simply because the simulated network may be saturated.

To make an AS analysis of simulation results, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar.

The Point Analysis window is displayed. (see Figure 9-10).

Step 2 Click the AS Analysis tab.

Page 155: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-152 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 3 At the top of the AS Analysis tab, choose from the Simulation list, the simulation or group of simulations you want to base the AS analysis on.

Step 4 Choose the Terminal, Service, and Mobility.

Step 5 Right-click the Point Analysis window and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Choose or clear the following options:

Whether shadowing is to be taken into account (and, if so, the cell edge coverage probability and shadowing margin).

Whether indoor coverage is to be taken into account. Whether downgrading is allowed.

Step 7 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

Step 8 Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer.

As you move the pointer, the U-Net indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 9-27).

Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 9-28 for an explanation of the displayed information.

Step 9 Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position.

To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position.

Step 10 Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.

----End

Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results When no simulations are available, the U-Net uses the UL load factorm the DL total power, the UL reuse factor, the HSDPA power, the number of HSDPA users, the number of HSUPA users, and the UL load factor due to HSUPA defined for each cell to make coverage predictions.

Once you have made simulations, the U-Net can use this information instead of the defined parameters in the cell properties to make coverage predictions where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a terminal, mobility, profile, and service. For each coverage prediction based on simulation results, you can base the coverage prediction on a chosen simulation or on a group of simulations, choosing either an average analysis of all simulations in the group or a statistical analysis based on a defined probability.

The prediction coverages that can use simulation results are:

Coverage predictions on the pilot or on a service: − Pilot Reception Analysis − Service Area Downlink − Service Area Uplink − Effective Service Area

Coverage predictions on noise and interference:

Page 156: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-153

− Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a downlink total noise coverage prediction, refer to "13.Studying Downlink Total Noise."

− Pilot Pollution: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, refer to "14.Calculating Pilot Pollution."

A handover status coverage prediction to analyze macro-diversity performance: Handoff Status: For information on making a handover status coverage prediction, refer to "15.Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction."

An HSDPA coverage prediction to analyze A-DPCH qualities, HS-SCCH power or quality per HS-SCCH channel and to model fast link adaptation. HSDPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSDPA coverage prediction, refer to "HSDPA Coverage Prediction."

An HSUPA coverage prediction to analyze the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, the required terminal power, and the obtained HSUPA bearer. HSUPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSUPA coverage prediction, refer to "HSUPA Coverage Prediction."

The procedures for the prediction coverages assume that simulation results are not available. When no simulations are available, you choose "(None)" from the Simulation list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations.

To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Condition tab.

Step 2 From the Simulation list, choose the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage prediction.

Step 3 If you choose a group of simulations from the Simulation list, choose one of the following:

All: If you choose All to make a statistical analysis of all simulations based on the defined Probability (the probability must be between 0 and 1). This will make a global analysis of all simulations in a group and with an evaluation of the network stability in terms of fluctuations in traffic.

Average: Choose Average make the coverage prediction on the average of the simulations in the group.

----End

9.3 Optimizing and Verifying Network Capacity An important step in the process of creating a UMTS HSPA network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done using measurements of strength of the pilot signal in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path.

The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimize the network.

Page 157: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-154 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

9.3.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In the U-Net, you can analyze drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT).

For the U-Net to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information:

The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point.

Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbor cells, or any other cells). In UMTS networks, a cell is identified by its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which columns contain the scrambling code of cells, the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in the file. Because a scrambling code can belong to several groups, you can also indicate from which the scrambling code has been chosen.

You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files of the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file.

To import one or several test mobile data files, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 You can import one or several files. Choose the file or files you want to open.

If you are importing more than one file, you can choose contiguous files by clicking the first file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can choose non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to import.

Step 5 Click Open.

The Import of Measurement Files dialog box is displayed.

Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into the U-Net; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialog box.

Step 6 If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can choose it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialog box. If you do not have an import configuration, continue to click the General tab.

On the General tab, under Configuration, choose an import configuration from the Configuration list.

Page 158: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-155

When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type

list of the Open dialog box, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have chosen a file and clicked Open, the U-Net automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, the U-Net chooses the first configuration in the list.

The defined configurations are stored in the file "MeasImport.ini." This file is located in the directory where the U-Net is installed. For more information on the MeasImport.ini file, refer to the Administrator Manual.

Step 7 Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters:

Name: By default, the U-Net names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired.

Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions,

− Units: Choose the measurement units used. − Coordinates: By default, the U-Net imports the coordinates using the display system

of the document. You can convert the coordinates used in the file to the projection system used by the U-Net document by clicking the Browse button ( ) and choosing the appropriate system.

Step 8 Click the Setup tab shown in Figure 9-38.

Figure 9-38 The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialog box

1. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, choose the data Separator, and choose the Decimal Symbol used in the file.

2. Click Setup to link file columns and internal U-Net fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialog box is displayed.

3. Choose the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file.

Page 159: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-156 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by choosing them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.

4. In the SC Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC_Group" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. The U-Net will then search for columns with this string in the column name.

5. If there is no scrambling code group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the SC Group Identifier box empty.

6. In the SC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code of scanned cells, enter it here. The U-Net will then search for columns with this string in the column name.

7. From the Scramb. Code Format list, choose the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Hexadecimal."

8. Click OK to close the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialog box.

If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values

in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialog box, the U-Net should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and choose the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "<Ignore>." If a column is marked with "<Ignore>", it will not be imported.

The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the scrambling code group and the scrambling code are placed before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise, the U-Net will not be able to properly import the file.

Step 9 If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration:

1. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, enter the Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.csv").

2. Click Save and enter a name for this import configuration in the Saving Configuration dialog box.

3. Click OK. The U-Net will now choose this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the chosen extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you will be able to choose this import configuration from the Configuration list.

Step 10 Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The mobile data are imported into the current U-Net document.

----End

9.3.2 Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the UMTS HSPDA network. To improve the relevance of the data, the U-Net allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions, either by comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new coverage predictions using the imported test mobile data.

Page 160: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-157

In this section, the following are described:

Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths Comparing Measurements with Predictions Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter Analyzing Data Variations Along the Path

Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside of the median values to be useful in calibration. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from the more lightly populated region between the two.

In the U-Net, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties.

To filter out incompatible points by clutter class, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.

Step 3 Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click the Filter tab.

By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed.

Step 6 Clear the check box of each clutter class whose points you do not want to use.

You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by choosing the Delete points outside the filter check box.

Step 7 Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialog box.

----End

To filter out incompatible points using a filter:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.

Step 3 Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Page 161: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-158 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Step 5 Click the Filter tab.

Step 6 Click More.

The Filter dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Click the Filter tab:

1. Choose a Field from the list. 2. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the chosen field.

Choose the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.

Step 8 Click the Advanced tab:

In the Column row, choose the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Choose as many columns as you want.

Figure 9-39 The Filter dialog box –Advanced tab

Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as described in the following table:

Formula Data Is Kept in the Table Only If

=X value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)

<> X value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)

< X numerical value is less than X

>X numerical value is greater than X

<=X numerical value is less than or equal to X

>=X numerical value is greater than or equal to X

*X* text objects which contain X

*X text objects end with X

X* text objects which start with X

Page 162: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-159

Step 9 Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined.

Combinations of filters are first made horizontally, then vertically.

Step 10 Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialog box.

The Refresh Geo Data option available in the shortcut menu of Test Mobile Data paths enables you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.

----End

Comparing Measurements with Predictions 1.Creating Coverage Predictions for Test Mobile Data Paths

You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path:

Pilot signal level and coverage by signal level Pilot reception analysis (Ec /I0), service area (Eb/Nt) downlink, and service area (Eb/Nt)

uplink.

To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.

Step 3 Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Calculations > Create a New Study from the shortcut menu.

The Study Types dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Under Standard Studies, choose one of the following coverage predictions and click OK:

Coverage by Signal Level: Click the Condition tab. At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you can choose whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal. If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you choose the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Finally, you can choose the Carrier to be studied.

Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec/I0): Click the Condition tab. − On the Condition tab, you can choose which Simulation to study. Or you can choose

a group of simulations and either choose All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (between 0 and 1) or choose Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations.

− If you want to perform the prediction without a simulation, you can choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

− You must choose a Terminal, Service, and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

Page 163: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-160 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

− You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink: Click the Condition tab. − On the Condition tab, you can choose which Simulation to study. Or you can choose

a group of simulations and either choose All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (between 0 and 1) or choose Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations.

− If you want to perform the prediction without a simulation, you can choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

− You must choose a Terminal, Service and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

− If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink: Click the Condition tab. − On the Condition tab, you can choose which Simulation to study. Or you can choose

a group of simulations and either choose All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (between 0 and 1) or choose Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations.

− If you want to perform the prediction without a simulation, you can choose "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the U-Net calculates the prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.

− You must choose a Terminal, Service and Mobility. You must also choose which Carrier is to be considered.

− If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) prediction to consider shadowing, you can choose the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.

− You can choose the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.

Step 6 When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK.

You can create a new coverage prediction. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click each new coverage prediction.

Step 7 When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile data. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 8 Choose Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the shortcut menu.

A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the predicted values of the chosen parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned to the transmitter for the main matrix.

----End

Page 164: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-161

You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on the Test Mobile Data window, see xref WHERE WILL THIS GO/BE?.

Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter You can extract a specific field for a specific transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the table for the test mobile data.

To extract a field from a test mobile path, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.

Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field.

The shortcut medu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Focus on a Transmitter from the shortcut menu.

The Field Choose for a Given Transmitter dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose a transmitter from the the Transmitter list.

Step 5 Click the For the Fields list.

The list is displayed.

Step 6 Choose the check box beside the field you want extract for the chosen transmitter.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Analyzing Data Variations Along the Path In the U-Net, you can analyze variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point.

To analyze data variations by using the Test Mobile Data window, perform the following steps.

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.

Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyze.

The shortcut medu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Open the Analysis Tool from the shortcut menu.

Page 165: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-162 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The Test Mobile Data window is displayed (shown in Figure 9-40).

Figure 9-40 The Test Mobile Data window

Step 4 Click Display at the top of the Test Mobile Data window.

The Display Parameters dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 In the Display Parameters dialog box:

1. Choose the check box next to any field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window.

2. If you wish, you can change the display color by clicking the color in the Color column and choosing a new color from the palette that is displayed.

3. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialog box.

You can change the display status or the color of more than one field at a time, using the shortcut menu in the Display Parameters dialog box. You can choose contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field you want to import. You can choose non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the color by right-clicking on the chosen fields and choosing the choice from the shortcut menu.

The chosen fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window.

Step 6 Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window to display the corresponding test mobile data path in the map window.

The test mobile data path is displayed in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the serving cell, with a number identifying the best server (see Figure 9-40). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same color as the transmitter..

Page 166: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-163

You can change the zoom level of the data displayed in the Test Mobile Data window by

right-clicking the window and choosing Zoom In or Zoom Out from the shortcut menu. You can set the range of data displayed when zooming in by clicking the beginning of the range in

the Test Mobile Data window, choosing 1st Zoom Point from the shortcut menu, and then clicking the end of the range in the Test Mobile Data window and choosing Last Zoom Point from the shortcut menu.

----End

9.3.3 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, using the shortcut menu in the Test Mobile Data window.

To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.

Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyze.

The shortcut medu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Open the Analysis Tool from the shortcut menu.

The Test Mobile Data window is displayed (see Figure 9-40).

Step 4 Define the display parameters and zoom level.

Step 5 Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

To export the Test Mobile Data window:

1. Choose Copy from the shortcut menu. 2. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data

window. 3. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document.

To print the Test Mobile Data window:

1. Choose Print from the shortcut menu. The Print dialog box is displayed. 2. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.

----End

9.4 Advanced Configuration 9.4.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference

If you want the U-Net to take into account the interference between two carriers, you must create a carrier pair with an interference reduction factor. The U-Net will take the interference reduction factor into account on both the uplink and the downlink.

Page 167: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-164 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

To create a pair of carriers with an interference reduction factor, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Cells > Interference Reduction Factors from the shortcut menu.

The Inter-Carrier Interference Reduction Factor table is displayed.

Step 4 For each carrier pair for which you want define inter-carrier interference:

1. Enter the first carrier of the pair in the 1st Carrier column. 2. Enter the second carrier of the pair in the 2nd Carrier column. 3. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When the

U-Net is calculating interference, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. If the interference reduction factor is set to "0," the U-Net assumes that the carriers in the defined pair generate as much interference as cells with the same carrier interference.

4. For every pair of carriers that is not defined, the U-Net assumes that there is no inter-carrier interference.

5. Press Enter to create the carrier pair and to create a new row.

----End

9.4.2 Defining Frequency Bands To define frequency bands, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For each frequency band, enter:

Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "Band 2100." This name will be displayed in other dialog boxs when you choose a frequency band.

Average Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency. First Carrier: Enter the number of the first carrier in this frequency band. Last Carrier: Enter the number of the last carrier in this frequency band. If this

frequency band has only one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Carrier field.

When you have more than one frequency band, the carriers must be numbered sequentially, contiguously (that is, you cannot skip numbers in a range of carriers, and the range of carriers in one band cannot overlap the range of carriers in another), and uniquely (that is, you can only use each number once). For example: Band 2100: First carrier: 0; Last carrier 1 and Band 900: First carrier: 2 and Last carrier: 2

Spreading Width (MHz): Enter the width, in MHz, that this frequency band will cover.

Step 5 When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close.

Page 168: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-165

----End

9.4.3 The Global Transmitter Parameters On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialog box, you can define many network parameters that are used in UMTS power control simulations. Many parameters are used as default values for all transmitters.

This section describes the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialog box, and describes how to access the tab.

The Options on the Global Parameters Tab The Global Parameters tab has the following options:

DL Power: Under DL Power, you can define whether the power values on the downlink are Absolute or Relative to Pilot. The power values affected are the synchronisation channel and other common channels powers defined in the cell properties, as well as the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers per R99 radio bearer.

Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the parameters used to calculate interference on the downlink: the orthogonality factor, and the method used to calculate I0 and Nt. − Default Ortho. Factor: The default orthogonality factor (between 0 and 1) enables

you to take into account the non-orthogonality of OVSF codes caused by multipath. − I0: You can choose "Total noise" and the U-Net will calculate I0 using the noise

generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can "Without pilot" and the U-Net will calculate I0 using the total noise less the pilot signal and orthogonal part of traffic channels and other common channels.

− Nt: You can choose "Total noise" and the U-Net will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can choose "Without useful signal" and the U-Net will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell.

Handoff: Under Handoff, you can define the parameters used to model soft handoff on the uplink. − Default UL Macro-Diversity Gain: You can set a default value for the uplink gain

due to macro-diversity on soft and soft-soft handovers. If you clear the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab when defining a coverage prediction or during a point analysis, the U-Net uses this value. If you choose the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab, the U-Net calculates the UL macro-diversity gain, based on the standard deviation value of Eb/Nt on the uplink defined per clutter class.

− +MRC in Softer/Soft: If you choose the +MRC (maximal ratio combining) in Softer/Soft check box, the U-Net chooses the serving cell during a softer/soft handover by recombining the signal of co-site transmitters and multiplying the resulting signal by the rake efficiency factor and then comparing this value to the signal received at transmitters located on the other sites of the active set. The U-Net chooses the greatest value and multiplies it by the macro-diversity gain.

Compressed Mode: Under Compressed Mode, you can define the parameters related to compressed mode. Compressed mode is used when a mobile supporting compressed mode is connected to a cell located on a site with a compressed-mode-capable equipment and either the pilot RSCP, or the received Ec/I0, or both of them are lower than the defined activation thresholds.

Page 169: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-166 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

− RSCP Activation Threshold: You can choose the RSCP Active check box and enter a RSCP Activation Threshold.

− Ec/I0 Activation Threshold: You can choose the Ec/I0 Active check box and enter a Ec/I0 Activation Threshold.

You must choose either the RSCP Active check box or the Ec /I0 Active check box or both.

− Eb/Nt UL and DL Target Increase: When compressed mode is activated, Eb/Nt requirements in UL and DL are increased. In order to take this into account, the U-Net adds UL and DL Eb/Nt target increase values to the UL and DL Eb/Nt requirements set for each radio bearer.

HSDPA: Under HSDPA, you can define how total noise is calculated and how the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) is evaluated for HSDPA. − Nt: You can choose "Total noise" and the U-Net will calculate Nt as the noise

generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise (whatever the hell that is) or you can choose "Without useful signal" and the U-Net will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell.

− CQI: You can choose “Based on CPICH quality” and the U-Net will measure the CQI based on the pilot Ec/Nt or you can choose “Based on HSPDSCH quality” and the U-Net will measure the CQI based on the HSPDSCH Ec/Nt. Depending on the option chosen, you will have to define either a CQI=f(CPICH Ec/Nt) graph, or a CQI=f(HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt) graph in the Properties dialog box of the terminal equipment. The calculated CQI will be used to determine the best bearer.

Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialog box.

To change global transmitter parameters, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click on the Transmitters folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Transmitters Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Global Parameters tab.

Step 5 Modify the parameters.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

9.4.4 Radio Bearers Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. In this section, the following are described:

Defining R99 Radio Bearers Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers

Page 170: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-167

Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers

Defining R99 Radio Bearers Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the R99 Radio Bearer table.

Only the following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions:

Max TCH Power (dBm) UL and DL Target (dB) per mobility The type of bearer.

To create or modify an R99 radio bearer, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Services folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose R99 Radio Bearer from the shortcut menu.

The R99 Radio Bearer table is displayed.

Step 5 In the R99 Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields:

Name: You can modify the name of the bearer. If you are creating a new R99 radio bearer, enter a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).

Nominal Uplink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal uplink rate in kilobytes per second.

Nominal Downlink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal downlink rate in kilobytes per second.

Type: Choose or modify the service type. There are four classes: Conversational, Streaming, Interactive, and Background. This field corresponds to the QoS (quality of service) class or traffic class that the bearer will belong to.

Uplink Coding Factor: Enter or modify the uplink coding factor. Downlink Coding Factor: Enter or modify the downlink coding factor. The uplink and

downlink coding factors model the data rate increase due to coding operations (CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) attachment, transport block concatenation and code block segmentation, channel coding, radio frame equalisation, interleaving, radio frame segmentation, and rate matching). The uplink and downlink coding factors are only used to estimate the number of OVSF codes required by the service.

UL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio: Enter or modify the uplink DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel)/DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) power ratio. The DPCH power is the combination of the DPCCH and the DPDCH (Dedicated Physical Data Channel) power.

DL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio: Enter or modify the downlink DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel)/DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) power ratio.

Min. TCH Power (dBm): Enter or modify the minimum traffic channel power. The minimum and maximum traffic channel power make up the dynamic range for downlink power control.

Page 171: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-168 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Max TCH Power (dBm): Enter or modify the maximum traffic channel power.

The maximum and minimum traffic channel powers can be either absolute values or values relative to the pilot power; this depends on the option defined on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialog box.

Step 6 When you have finished entering or modifying the R99 radio bearer parameters, double-click the row of the R99 radio bearer to open the bearer’s Properties dialog box.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Click the General tab.

The options on the General tab are the same as those uplink and downlink Spreading Factor is calculated automatically by the U-Net according to 3GPP specifications. The coding factor is only used to evaluate the spreading factor, that is, the number of OVSF codes required by the service.

Click the Eb/Nt tab. On the Eb/Nt tab, you can define downlink and uplink Eb/Nt requirements. These are the thresholds (in dB) that must be reached to provide users with the service. These parameters depend on the mobility type and reception equipment; these parameters must be defined for each possible combination of mobility type and reception equipment.

Using Transmission (Tx) and Reception (Rx) diversity results in a quality gain on received downlink and uplink Eb/Nt. In the U-Net, this is modelled by reducing the downlink and uplink Eb/Nt requirements. Therefore, in addition to downlink and uplink Eb/Nt requirements, you can specify gains on received downlink and uplink Eb/Nt for each possible diversity configuration. The U-Net will consider them when Tx or Rx diversity configurations are assigned to transmitters. − Mobility: Choose a mobility type from the list. − Reception Equipment: Choose a type of reception equipment from the list. You can

create a new type of reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table, right-click the Terminals folder in the UMTS Parameters folder on the Data tab and choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.

− UL Target (dB): Enter or modify the uplink (Eb/Nt) threshold. − UL 2RX div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the two-receiver uplink diversity gain in

dB. − UL 4RX div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the four-receiver uplink diversity gain in

dB. − DL Target (dB): Enter or modify the downlink (Eb/Nt) threshold. − DL Open Loop div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink open loop diversity

gain in dB. − DL Closed Loop div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink closed loop diversity

gain in dB.

Step 8 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

----End

Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers In each cell, the scheduler chooses the HSDPA resource per UE and per TTI. This HSDPA resource is called a TFRC (Transport Format Resource Combination) and is the set of

Page 172: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-169

parameters such as the transport format, the modulation scheme, and the number of used HS-PDSCH channels. In the U-Net, the TFRC are referred to as HSDPA radio bearers.

During a simulation, and for the HSDPA coverage prediction, the U-Net chooses a suitable HSDPA radio bearer and uses its RLC peak rate. The HSDPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels, transport block size, and whether it uses 16 QAM modulation), cell capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels), and reported CQI.

The HSDPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSDPA radio bearers. You can create new HSDPA radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the HSDPA Radio Bearer table.

To open the HSDPA Radio Bearer table, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Services folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose HSDPA Radio Bearer from the shortcut menu.

The HSDPA Radio Bearer table is displayed with the following information:

Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number. Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits. Number of HS-PDSCH Channels Used: The number of HSPDSCH channels used. 16QAM Modulation Used: The check box is chosen if the HSDPA radio bearer uses

16QAM modulation. If this option is not chosen, the U-Net assumes that QPSK modulation is used.

RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding (redundancy, overhead and addressing).

----End

Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers In each cell, the scheduler chooses the HSUPA resource per UE, per Node B, and per user service. This HSUPA resource is called a TFC (Transport Format Combination) and requires a defined ratio of EDPDCH power over DPCCH power. This ratio is modelled as the required EDPDCH Ec/Nt. The combination of the TFC and the power offset is modelled in the U-Net as HSUPA radio bearers.

During a simulation, and for the HSUPA coverage prediction, the U-Net chooses a suitable HSUPA radio bearer. The HSUPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of EDPDCH codes, smallest spreading factor, and TTI length) and the required EDPDCH Ec/Nt.

The HSUPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSUPA radio bearers.

To open the HSUPA Radio Bearer table, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Services folder.

Page 173: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-170 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose HSUPA Radio Bearer from the shortcut menu.

The HSUPA Radio Bearer table is displayed:

Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number. TTI Duration (ms): The TTI duration in ms. The TTI can be 2 or 10 ms. Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits. Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The number of E-DPDCH channels used. Minimum Spreading Factor: The minimum spreading factor used. RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding

(redundancy, overhead and addressing).

----End

9.4.5 Site Equipment

Creating Site Equipment To create a new piece of UMTS site equipment, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click on the Sites folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Equipment > Open Table from the shortcut menu.

The Equipment table is displayed.

Step 4 In the Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For the new piece of UMTS equipment you are creating, enter the following: its name, the manufacturer name and define:

Name: The name you enter will be the one used to identify this piece of equipment. Manufacturer: The name of the manufacturer of this piece of equipment. MUD factor: Multi-User Detection (MUD) is a technology used to decrease

intra-cellular interference in the uplink. MUD is modeled by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MUD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.

Rake receiver efficiency factor: This factor enables the U-Net to model the rake receiver on UL. The U-Net uses this factor to calculate the uplink SHO gain and uplink signal quality in simulations, point-to-point handover analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is considered in the uplink for softer and softer-softer handovers; it is applied to the sum of signals received on the same site. The factor value can be between 0 and 1. It models losses due to the imperfection of signal recombination.

The rake efficiency factor used to model the recombination in downlink can be set in terminal properties.

Carrier selection: Carrier selection refers to the carrier selection method used during the transmitter admission control in the mobile active set. The chosen strategy is used in simulations when no carrier is specified in the properties of the service (all the carriers

Page 174: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-171

can be used for the service) or when the carrier specified for the service is not used by the transmitter. On the other hand, the specified carrier selection mode is always taken into account in predictions (AS analysis and coverage studies). Choose one of the following: − UL min. noise: The carrier with the minimum UL noise (carrier with the lowest UL

load factor) is chosen. − DL min. power: The carrier with the minimum DL total power is chosen. − Random: The carrier is randomly chosen. − Sequential: Carriers are sequentially loaded. The first carrier is chosen as long as it is

not overloaded. Then, when the maximum uplink load factor is reached, the second carrier is chosen and so on.

Overhead uplink and downlink CEs: The overhead uplink and downlink channel elements (CEs) correspond to the numbers of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels in the uplink and downlink. This setting is also used for OVSF code allocation; it indicates the number of OVSF codes to be allocated to control channels per cell.

AS restricted to neighbors: Choose this option if you want the other transmitters in the active set to belong to the neighbor list of the best server.

Compressed Mode: If you choose this option, cells located on sites with this equipment are able to manage compressed mode when radio conditions require it. Compressed mode is generally used to prepare the hard handover of users with single receiver terminals.

Step 5 Click the Close button ( ) to close the table.

----End

Defining Channel Element Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and R99 Radio Bearer

The number of channel elements consumed by a user depends on the site equipment, on the R99 radio bearer, and the link direction (up or down). The number of channel elements consumed can be defined for UMTS simulations.

To define channel element consumption during UMTS simulations, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click on the Sites folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Equipment > Channel Element Consumption from the shortcut menu.

The CE Consumption table is displayed.

Step 4 For each equipment-R99 radio bearer pair, enter in the CE Consumption table the number of UL and DL channel elements that the U-Net will consume during the power control simulation.

Step 5 Click the Close button ( ) to close the table.

----End

Page 175: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-172 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

9.4.6 Receiver Equipment

Setting Receiver Height When you make UMTS coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver.

To define the height of the receiver, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click on the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Predictions Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click the Receiver tab.

Step 5 Enter a receiver Height.

This value will be used when calculating a UMTS coverage predictions and a point analysis.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment In the U-Net, reception equipment is used when you create a terminal. The graphs defined for each reception equipment entry are used for quality studies and for choosing HSDPA and HSUPA bearers.

To create or modify reception equipment, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Terminals folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.

The Reception Equipment table is displayed.

"Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals.

Step 5 Double-click the reception equipment type you want to modify.

The reception equipment type’s Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can create a new reception equipment type by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.

Step 6 Click the Quality Graphs tab.

Step 7 Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each R99 Bearer.

Page 176: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-173

You can edit the values in the DL and UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by choosing the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons.

The DL and UL Quality Indicator tables describe the variation of the quality indicator as a function of the measured parameter (as defined in the Quality Indicators table). The Uplink and Downlink Quality Graphs are used for quality studies. If no Mobility is entered, the values in the quality graphs are used for all mobility types.

Step 8 Click the HSDPA Bearer Selection tab.

Step 9 Ensure that the values for each Mobility in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table have been entered.

You can edit the values in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by choosing the Mobility and clicking the CQI Graph or the Best Bearer Graph buttons.

The CQI table describes the variation of the CPICH CQI as a function of the CPICH Ec/Nt (or the variation of HS-PDSCH CQI as a function of the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt); the values displayed depend on the calculation parameter you have chosen in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialog box.

The Best HSDPA Bearer table describes the index of the best HSDPA bearer as a function of the HSPDSCH CQI.

The CQI graphs and best bearer graphs are used in the simulation and in the HSDPA prediction study to model fast link adaptation (selection of the HSDPA bearer).

The supplier RRM (radio resource management) strategy can be taken into account using the Best HSDPA Bearer table, for example:

You can define several pieces of reception equipment with a separate table for each. You can reserve low bearer indexes for poor-performance reception equipment and higher bearer indexes for high-performance equipment.

You can specify a graph for each mobility. Here, you can reserve low bearer indexes for high speeds and higher bearer indexes for low speeds.

You can also give priority to either one user by assigning him a high bearer index or to all users by assigning them low bearer indexes.

Step 10 Click the HSDPA Quality Graphs tab.

Step 11 Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Radio Bearer Index. You can edit the values in the DL Quality Indicator Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by choosing the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graph button.

The Downlink Quality table describes the variation of the BLER as a function of the HSPDSCH Ec/Nt. It is used to calculate the application throughput for the HSDPA coverage prediction. If no Mobility is entered, the values in the quality graphs are used for all mobility types.

Step 12 Click the HSUPA Bearer Selection tab.

Step 13 Ensure that, for each Radio Bearer Index and Mobility pair, you have entered a value for the Number of Retransmissions and for the Requested Ec/Nt Threshold.

The values are used in the simulation and in the HSUPA prediction to model noise rise scheduling and in the selection of the HSUPA radio bearer.

Page 177: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-174 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

Early Termination Probabilities is intended for future use; it is not at present used by the U-Net.

Step 14 Click the HSUPA Quality Graphs tab.

Step 15 Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Radio Bearer Index and that there is a value defined for the Number of Retransmissions. You can edit the values in the UL Quality Indicator Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by choosing the Quality Indicator and clicking the Uplink Quality Graph button.

The Uplink Quality table describes the variation of the BLER as a function of the EDPDCH Ec/Nt. It is used to calculate the application throughput for the HSUPA coverage prediction. If no Mobility is entered, the values in the quality graphs are used for all mobility types.

Step 16 Click OK to close the reception equipment type's Properties dialog box.

----End

HSDPA UE Categories HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardized into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.

To edit a UE category, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Terminals folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose HSDPA User Equipment Categories from the shortcut menu.

The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table is displayed.

Step 5 The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns:

Category: The number identifying the HSDPA UE category. Max. Number of HS-PDSCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-PDSCH

channels allowed for the category. Min. Number of TTI Between Two TTI Used: The minimum number of TTI

(Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used. Max. Transport Block Size (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for the

category. 16QAM Modulation: Choose the check box if the category supports 16QAM

modulation. If 16QAM modulation is not chosen, QPSK is used.

----End

HSUPA UE Categories HSUPA user equipment capabilities are standardized into 6 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.

To edit a UE category, perform the following steps:

Page 178: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-175

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.

Step 3 Right-click the Terminals folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Choose HSUPA User Equipment Categories from the shortcut menu.

The HSUPA User Equipment Categories table is displayed.

Step 5 The HSUPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns:

Category: The number identifying the HSUPA UE category. Max. Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The maximum number of E-DPDCH codes

allowed for the category. TTI 2 ms: Choose the check box if a TTI of 2 ms is supported. If a 2 ms TTI is not

chosen, a 10 ms TTI is used. Minimum Spreading Factor: Enter the minimum spreading factor supported. Maximum Block Size for a 2 ms TTI (bits): The maximum transport block size

allowed for a 2 ms TTI. Maximum Block Size for a 10 ms TTI (bits): The maximum transport block size

allowed for a 10 ms TTI.

----End

9.4.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set The mobile active set is the list of the transmitters to which the mobile is connected. The active set may consist of one or more transmitters; depending on whether the service supports soft handover and on the terminal active set size. The quality of the pilot (Ec/I0) is what determines whether or not a transmitter can belong to the active set.

In order for a given transmitter to enter the mobile active set as best server, the pilot quality from this transmitter must exceed an upper threshold defined in the properties of the mobility type. In addition, the pilot quality must be the highest one.

In order for a transmitter to enter the active set:

It must use the same carrier as the best server transmitter. In the U-Net, carriers are modeled using cells.

The pilot quality difference between the cell and the best server must not exceed the AS-threshold set per cell.

If you have chosen to restrict the active set to neighbors, the transmitter must be a neighbor of the best server. You can restrict the active set to neighbors by choosing the AS Restricted to Neighbors option in the Site Equipment table.

The active set for HSDPA users is different in the following way: HSDPA physical channels do not support soft handover; therefore the user is never connected to more than one transmitter at a time. This transmitter is chosen from HSDPA-capable cells only.

9.4.8 Modeling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same

Page 179: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

9 UMTS HSPA Networks GENEX U-Net

User Manual - Volume I

9-176 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-05-12)

location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment.

Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse.

The U-Net uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model.

For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of 70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than 77 dBm 85% of the time.

In UMTS projects, the model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on Ec/I0 and Eb/Nt values and the macro-diversity gain.

Shadowing can be taken into consideration when the U-Net calculates the signal level, Ec/I0, and Eb/Nt

A coverage prediction.

The U-Net always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte-Carlo-based UMTS simulation.

You can display the shadowing margins and the macro-diversity gain per clutter class.

Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class To display the shadowing margins and macro-diversity gain per clutter class, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Right-click the Predictions folder.

The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Choose Shadowing Margins from the shortcut menu.

The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialog box is displayed (see Figure 9-41).

Step 4 You can set the following parameters:

Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialog box is for information only.

Standard Deviation: Choose the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin or macro-diversity gains: − From Model: The model standard deviation. The U-Net will display the shadowing

margin of the signal level. − Ec/I0: The Ec/I0 standard deviation. The U-Net will display the Ec/I0 shadowing

margin and the resulting DL pilot macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains

Page 180: 01-09 Umts Hspa Networks

GENEX U-Net User Manual - Volume I 9 UMTS HSPA Networks

Issue 01 (2007-05-12) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-177

will be calculated using the values you enter in The first and The second Best Signal Difference and The third and The fourth Best Signal Difference.

− Eb/Nt UL: The Eb/Nt UL standard deviation. The U-Net will display the Eb/Nt UL shadowing margin and the resulting UL macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter in The first and The second Best Signal Difference and The third and The fourth Best Signal Difference.

− Eb/Nt DL: The Eb/Nt DL standard deviation. The U-Net will display the Eb/Nt DL shadowing margin.

Step 5 If you choose "Ec/I0" or "Eb/Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, you can enter the differences that will be used to calculate the macro-diversity gain under Macro-Diversity Parameters:

The first and the second Best Signal Difference: If you chosen "Ec/I0" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Ec/I0 difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to calculate DL macro-diversity gains. If you chosen "Eb/Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to calculate UL macro-diversity gains.

The second and the third Best Signal Difference: If you choose "Ec/I0" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Ec/I0 difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used to calculate DL macro-diversity gains. If you choose "Eb/Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used to calculate UL macro-diversity gains.

Step 6 Click Calculate.

The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. If you choose "Ec/I0" or "Eb/Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, the U-Net also displays the macro-diversity gains for two links and for three links.

Step 7 Click Close to close the dialog box.

Figure 9-41 The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialog box

----End


Recommended